[go: up one dir, main page]

CN104903922B - Fill order at inventory stand - Google Patents

Fill order at inventory stand Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN104903922B
CN104903922B CN201380058814.4A CN201380058814A CN104903922B CN 104903922 B CN104903922 B CN 104903922B CN 201380058814 A CN201380058814 A CN 201380058814A CN 104903922 B CN104903922 B CN 104903922B
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
inventory
holder
order
holders
items
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
CN201380058814.4A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN104903922A (en
Inventor
麦克尔·C·蒙士
彼得·R·吴曼
史蒂文·A·威尔逊
卡洛琳·F·马乐丽
彭舟舟
约瑟夫·W·杜伦汉
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Amazon Technologies Inc
Original Assignee
Amazon Technologies Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US13/644,679 external-priority patent/US20140100999A1/en
Priority claimed from US13/644,646 external-priority patent/US9009072B2/en
Priority claimed from US13/644,591 external-priority patent/US9792577B2/en
Application filed by Amazon Technologies Inc filed Critical Amazon Technologies Inc
Publication of CN104903922A publication Critical patent/CN104903922A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN104903922B publication Critical patent/CN104903922B/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/08Logistics, e.g. warehousing, loading or distribution; Inventory or stock management
    • G06Q10/087Inventory or stock management, e.g. order filling, procurement or balancing against orders

Landscapes

  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Finance (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
  • Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
  • Operations Research (AREA)
  • Development Economics (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Warehouses Or Storage Devices (AREA)

Abstract

一种系统,其包括库存支架和移动驱动单元。所述库存支架包括第一侧和第二侧,所述第一侧包括限定区域,在所述区域处库存保持器被指定用于安放。所述库存支架可操作以在所述多个限定区域中的至少一个处从所述库存保持器中的至少一个接收库存物品。所述移动驱动单元可操作以沿所述库存支架的所述第二侧运送订单保持器,其中所述订单保持器可操作以在沿所述库存支架的所述第二侧的位置处从所述库存支架接收库存物品。

A system includes an inventory holder and a mobile drive unit. The inventory holder includes a first side and a second side, the first side including a defined area where inventory holders are designated for placement. The inventory holder is operable to receive inventory items from at least one of the inventory holders at at least one of the defined areas. The mobile drive unit is operable to transport an order holder along the second side of the inventory holder, wherein the order holder is operable to receive inventory items from the inventory holder at a location along the second side of the inventory holder.

Description

在库存支架处填充订单Fill order at stock stand

发明背景Background of the invention

现代库存系统面临有效履行订单的增大的需求,而不管库存和订单增大的复杂度和多样性。遭受低效使用系统资源的库存系统面临低系统处理量、未完成或延迟任务和令人无法接受的响应时间。因此,这种库存系统面临更有效使用时间、空间、设备和人力以符合其提升的需求的挑战。Modern inventory systems face increased demands to fulfill orders efficiently, despite the increased complexity and variety of inventory and orders. Inventory systems that suffer from inefficient use of system resources face low system throughput, incomplete or delayed tasks, and unacceptable response times. Thus, such inventory systems are challenged to more efficiently use time, space, equipment and manpower to meet their elevated demands.

附图简述Brief description of the drawings

为了更完整地理解本发明及其优点,现将参考下面结合附图所作的描述,其中:For a more complete understanding of the present invention and its advantages, reference should now be made to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:

图1是图示包括根据实例实施方案的库存支架的库存系统的组件的透视图;1 is a perspective view illustrating components of an inventory system including an inventory holder according to an example embodiment;

图2图示能够使用库存支架填充订单的库存系统的各个组件的侧视图;2 illustrates a side view of various components of an inventory system capable of filling orders using inventory holders;

图3图示能够使用多个库存支架填充订单的库存系统的另一实例实施方案的顶视图;3 illustrates a top view of another example embodiment of an inventory system capable of filling orders using multiple inventory holders;

图4图示能够使用多个库存支架填充订单的库存系统的另一实例实施方案的俯视图;4 illustrates a top view of another example embodiment of an inventory system capable of filling orders using multiple inventory holders;

图5图示用于使用库存支架履行订单的特定技术;Figure 5 illustrates certain techniques for fulfilling orders using inventory holders;

图6是使用库存支架填充订单的实例方法的流程图;6 is a flowchart of an example method of filling an order using an inventory holder;

图7是图示促进在库存支架处履行订单的实例方法的流程图;7 is a flowchart illustrating an example method of facilitating fulfillment of an order at an inventory holder;

图8是图示促进在库存支架处履行的实例的流程图;且8 is a flow diagram illustrating an example of facilitating fulfillment at an inventory holder; and

图9图示可用于本文中所公开的系统和方法中的一个或多个部分的实例计算系统。9 illustrates an example computing system that may be used for one or more portions of the systems and methods disclosed herein.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

许多实体利用库存系统来存储和管理库存。例如,一些零售商可利用在各个料箱中存储库存物品的仓库搁架。当零售商需要填充特定库存物品的订单时,工作人员通常从存储库存物品的料箱处检索库存物品。Many entities utilize inventory systems to store and manage inventory. For example, some retailers may utilize warehouse shelving that stores inventory items in individual bins. When a retailer needs to fill an order for a particular inventory item, workers typically retrieve the inventory item from the bin where the inventory item is stored.

本公开的库存系统可利用一个或多个移动驱动单元来从仓库存储自动检索库存保持器。库存保持器可以是完整的搁架,其中每个架具有用于各个库存物品的料箱。移动驱动单元可以是被配置来在仓库周围独立移动的机器人设备。架可由移动驱动单元运送到用于执行库存操作的站。站可包括操作人员和/或自动化设备以从库存保持器移除所需库存物品且完成订单。移动驱动单元运送库存物品到站以执行库存操作的能力而不是工作人员从固定架手动检索库存物品或除此之外可极大增大库存系统的效率和生产力。例如,通过利用移动驱动单元,库存系统可以能够比先前解决方案每小时履行更多个订单。移动单元可以响应于从自动化指导系统接收的命令和/或指令在仓库周围移动且/或检索库存保持器。例如,管理模块可以控制仓库内的特定元件和/或任务的监管和协调。管理模块可以接收仓库中的库存物品的订单且协调履行订单的任务指派,包括提供指令给移动驱动单元以将具有所请求库存物品的架运送到库存站以完成订单。管理模块还可在库存站提供如何装配订单的指导。The inventory system of the present disclosure may utilize one or more mobile drive units to automatically retrieve inventory holders from warehouse storage. Inventory holders may be complete racks, where each rack has bins for individual inventory items. A mobile drive unit may be a robotic device configured to independently move around a warehouse. Racks may be transported by mobile drive units to stations for performing inventory operations. Stations may include operators and/or automated equipment to remove required inventory items from inventory holders and fulfill orders. The ability of mobile drive units to deliver inventory items to stations to perform inventory operations, rather than or otherwise manually retrieving inventory items from fixed racks by workers, can greatly increase the efficiency and productivity of the inventory system. For example, by utilizing mobile drive units, an inventory system may be able to fulfill more orders per hour than previous solutions. Mobile units may move around the warehouse and/or retrieve inventory holders in response to commands and/or instructions received from the automated guidance system. For example, a management module may control the supervision and coordination of specific elements and/or tasks within a warehouse. The management module may receive orders for inventory items in the warehouse and coordinate task assignments to fulfill the orders, including providing instructions to mobile drive units to deliver racks with requested inventory items to inventory stations to fulfill the orders. The management module can also provide instructions on how to assemble the order at the inventory station.

为了使用简单说明,在办公供应店的分配仓库中,管理模块可以接收打印机、若干墨盒和纸盒的订单。管理模块可以确定这些物品在分配仓库中的存储架内的位置。所述物品可以例如在三个单独搁架的架上。管理模块可以发布任务使三个不同移动驱动单元检索分别保持打印机、墨盒和纸的每个搁架,以及使移动驱动单元运送保持这些物品到其中三个物品的订单可以包装到盒中用于装运的库存站的搁架。如此做时,管理模块可以协调各个任务使得以有效方式履行管理模块接收的所有订单。To use a simple illustration, in the distribution warehouse of an office supply store, the management module may receive an order for a printer, several ink cartridges, and paper boxes. The management module can determine the location of the items within the storage racks in the distribution warehouse. The items may for example be on a shelf of three separate shelves. The management module can issue tasks to have three different mobile drive units retrieve each rack that holds printers, ink cartridges, and paper, respectively, and have the mobile drive units ship hold these items to where orders for three of the items can be packed into boxes for shipping Shelving for stocking stations. In doing so, the management module can coordinate the various tasks so that all orders received by the management module are fulfilled in an efficient manner.

在许多库存系统中,小百分比的高速度和/或高体积库存负责大百分比的总体系统活动。高速度库存可指受欢迎的大百分比订单请求的库存,而高体积库存可指订单请求的大体积库存。体积可指特定库存物品在仓库中需要的立方空间的物理量。高体积库存物品可指大型或块体物品和/或个别订单大量购买的物品。在特定库存系统中,最多1%的库存物品可占超过20%的总系统活动。深受欢迎的物品可能需要移动驱动单元的对应高度使用以将库存保持器运送到库存站。类似地,高体积库存可能需要相对更多的劳力以补充存储这种物品的库存保持器,使得将这种物品拆解到库存保持器中可能比为订单只以其从批发商到达的方式使用库存更低效。可使用库存支架实现填充这种物品的订单的更有效方法。库存支架可以存储深受欢迎且/或高体积的库存。可以沿着库存支架的一侧定位存储受欢迎或高体积库存的库存保持器。库存支架可因此被配置成包括可配置数量的固定位置用于最多的库存物品。对于存储3,000个唯一库存物品的实例库存系统,少如三十个唯一库存物品可由于这种物品的高速度或高体积而占系统活动的高百分比。因此,在这种库存系统中,库存支架可包括足够量的限定区域以在库存支架处存储30个最多库存物品。订单保持器可例如是搁架,其被配置成保持将用于填充库存物品的订单的盒子或容器。每个盒子或容器可与特定订单相关。例如,订单保持器可存储用于若干墨盒和若干令纸的订单的装运的纸板盒。具有需要这种物品的订单的订单保持器可沿库存支架访问对应于存储订单所需的库存物品的库存保持器的位置。操作器可以从库存保持器处移除物品且将其放置到订单保持器中的适当盒子或容器中。如果需要,订单保持器然后可以被带到库存站以在订单保持器的盒子或容器中填充留在订单上的物品。In many inventory systems, a small percentage of high velocity and/or high volume inventory is responsible for a large percentage of overall system activity. High-velocity inventory may refer to inventory requested by a large percentage of orders, while high-volume inventory may refer to high-volume inventory requested by orders. Volume may refer to the physical quantity of cubic space that a particular inventory item requires in a warehouse. High-volume inventory items can refer to large or bulky items and/or items purchased in bulk on individual orders. In a particular inventory system, up to 1% of inventory items can account for more than 20% of the total system activity. Highly popular items may require corresponding height usage of the mobile drive unit to transport the stock holder to the stock station. Similarly, high-volume inventory may require relatively more labor to replenish the stock holders that store such items, so that dismantling such items into stock holders may be more efficient than ordering them only as they arrive from the wholesaler. Inventory is more efficient. A more efficient method of filling orders for such items can be achieved using inventory holders. Inventory holders store popular and/or high-volume inventory. Stock holders for storing popular or high volume stock can be positioned along the side of the stock holder. The inventory holder can thus be configured to include a configurable number of fixed positions for a maximum number of inventory items. For an example inventory system storing 3,000 unique inventory items, as few as thirty unique inventory items may account for a high percentage of system activity due to the high velocity or high volume of such items. Thus, in such an inventory system, the inventory holder may include a sufficient amount of defined area to store a maximum of 30 inventory items at the inventory holder. The order holder may, for example, be a shelf configured to hold boxes or containers to be used to fill orders for inventory items. Each box or container can be associated with a specific order. For example, an order holder may store cartons for shipment of an order of several ink cartridges and several reams of paper. An order holder with an order requiring such an item may access a location along the inventory rack corresponding to the inventory holder storing the inventory item required for the order. The operator can remove items from the inventory holder and place them into appropriate boxes or containers in the order holder. The order holder can then be taken to an inventory station to fill the order holder's box or container with the items left on the order, if desired.

为了说明,在上文讨论的办公供应实例中,纸可以是高体积库存物品且墨盒可以是深受欢迎的物品。因此,纸板和存储各种墨盒的库存保持器可安放在库存支架处。可以通过沿着与存储纸的货板相对的库存支架移动订单保持器到其中操作器可将纸传送到订单保持器的位置而填充纸和墨盒的若干包装的订单。订单保持器然后可移动到相对存储墨盒且其中相同或不同操作器可以将墨盒传送到订单保持器的库存保持器的位置。如果所请求的打印机并未存储在库存支架处,那么移动驱动单元可将订单保持器运送到库存站,其中另一移动驱动单元可运送含有打印机的库存保持器,使得可填充订单。To illustrate, in the office supply example discussed above, paper may be a high volume inventory item and ink cartridges may be a popular item. Thus, cardboard and stock holders storing various ink cartridges can be placed at the stock holders. An order for several packages of paper and ink cartridges can be filled by moving the order holder along the inventory rack opposite the pallet where the paper is stored to a position where an operator can deliver the paper to the order holder. The order holder can then be moved to a position relative to the stock holder that stores the ink cartridges and where the same or a different operator can deliver the ink cartridges to the order holder. If the requested printer is not stored at the inventory holder, the mobile drive unit may transport the order holder to the inventory station, where another mobile drive unit may transport the inventory holder containing the printer so that the order can be filled.

本公开的某些实施方案的技术优点包括提供用于使用库存支架来履行订单的系统和方法的能力。技术优点可包括在库存支架处安放高体积和/或高速度物体的能力。随着库存物品在库存系统内变化的需求,管理模块可包括在库存支架处取代库存的能力,因此确保最高速度和/或体积物品在库存支架处随时可用。另一技术优点可包括基于订单中位于库存支架处的物品将各个订单分组到订单保持器中的能力。因此,可在大体相同时间由单个订单保持器履行由单个移动驱动单元运送的若干订单。另外,多个订单保持器可以同时且/或并行地沿着库存支架移动,允许大体同时填充多个订单保持器中的订单。因此,库存系统可以能够达成比使用传统技术以其它方式实现的更大的操作效率。使用库存支架履行订单的库存系统可以能够比只使用库存站和/或传统挑选方法投入更少的移动驱动单元来履行订单。此外,以其它方式需要来运送多个库存保持器来填充高速度物品的订单的移动驱动单元的驱动时间可减少且/或投入到库存系统内的其它任务中。本发明的某些实施方案的进一步技术优点可包括提供灵活且可扩展的库存存储解决方案,所述解决方案可以很容易地适于适应系统增长和修改。本发明的某些实施方案的进一步技术优点可包括提供灵活且可扩展的库存存储解决方案,所述解决方案可以很容易地适应系统增长和更改。从以下附图、描述和所附权利要求书,本发明的其它技术优点对于本领域的技术人员将显而易见。Technical advantages of certain embodiments of the present disclosure include the ability to provide systems and methods for fulfilling orders using inventory holders. Technical advantages may include the ability to place high volume and/or high velocity objects at inventory holders. As demand for inventory items changes within the inventory system, the management module may include the ability to replace inventory at the inventory rack, thus ensuring that the highest velocity and/or volume items are readily available at the inventory rack. Another technical advantage may include the ability to group individual orders into order holders based on the items in the order located at the inventory holder. Thus, several orders shipped by a single mobile drive unit can be fulfilled by a single order holder at substantially the same time. Additionally, multiple order holders may move along the inventory rack simultaneously and/or in parallel, allowing orders in multiple order holders to be filled substantially simultaneously. Accordingly, the inventory system may be able to achieve greater operational efficiencies than would otherwise be achieved using conventional techniques. Inventory systems that use inventory racks to fulfill orders may be able to invest less mobile drive units in fulfilling orders than using only inventory stations and/or traditional picking methods. Furthermore, the drive time of the mobile drive unit that would otherwise be required to transport multiple stock holders to fill an order for high velocity items can be reduced and/or devoted to other tasks within the inventory system. A further technical advantage of certain embodiments of the present invention may include providing a flexible and scalable inventory storage solution that can be easily adapted to accommodate system growth and modifications. A further technical advantage of certain embodiments of the present invention may include providing a flexible and scalable inventory storage solution that can easily accommodate system growth and changes. Other technical advantages of the present invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the following figures, descriptions and appended claims.

虽然上文已列举了具有具体优点的具体实例,但是各个实施方案可包括所有、一些所列举的优点,或不包括所列举的优点。通过参考图1至图9,可最好地理解本发明的实施方案及其优点,其中相似编号指代各个附图的相似和对应部分。While specific examples having specific advantages have been enumerated above, various embodiments may include all, some, or none of the enumerated advantages. Embodiments of the present invention and advantages thereof are best understood by referring to FIGS. 1-9 , wherein like numerals refer to like and corresponding parts of the various drawings.

图1是图示包括根据实例实施方案的库存支架50的库存系统10的组件的透视图。如所示,库存系统10还包括管理模块15、各种移动驱动单元20、库存保持器30、货板保持器34、垃圾保持器36和订单保持器40。如所示,库存保持器30、货板保持器34和垃圾保持器36沿库存支架50的一侧被安放在限定区域80处。库存保持器30和货板保持器34可通常在库存支架50处的一个或多个操作器填充订单时保持库存物品42且在限定区域80处保持固定。然而,移动驱动单元20可在各个时间将库存保持器30和货板保持器34运送到限定区域80且从其中送出。例如,如所示,一个移动驱动单元20可从库存支架50移除货板保持器34,而另一移动驱动单元20用保持额外库存物品42的货板的新货板保持器34取代货板保持器34。为了填充订单,移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40移动到沿库存支架50的相对侧的位置。在各个位置处,移动驱动单元20可减慢和/或停止使得库存支架50处的操作器和/或自动化设备可从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34移除所请求库存物品42且将其放置到订单保持器40中的容器60中。在一些实施方案中,库存支架50的操作器可以是自动化设备和/或工作人员。如所示,订单保持器40可在库存支架50的一端开始且沿侧端移动直至到达相对端。在一些实施方案中,订单保持器40可沿库存支架50直接移动到在其处可接收库存物品42的位置。订单保持器40然后可在接收库存物品42(如例如由图1的虚箭头所指示)之后沿着库存支架50的侧面移动到在其处可从库存支架50接收另一库存物品42且/或可从其中移走另一库存物品42的位置。在访问库存支架50之后,订单保持器40可被运送到库存系统10中的其它适当位置。例如,如果订单保持器40中的订单完成,那么订单保持器40可被运送到装运站。FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating components of an inventory system 10 including an inventory holder 50 according to an example embodiment. As shown, inventory system 10 also includes management module 15 , various mobile drive units 20 , inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , waste holder 36 , and order holder 40 . As shown, inventory holders 30 , pallet holders 34 , and trash holders 36 are positioned along one side of inventory holder 50 at a defined area 80 . Inventory holders 30 and pallet holders 34 may generally hold inventory items 42 and remain stationary at defined area 80 while one or more operators at inventory holder 50 fill orders. However, mobile drive unit 20 may transport inventory holders 30 and pallet holders 34 to and from defined area 80 at various times. For example, as shown, one mobile drive unit 20 may remove the pallet holder 34 from the inventory holder 50 while the other mobile drive unit 20 replaces the pallet with a new pallet holder 34 holding a pallet of additional inventory items 42 Holder 34. To fill the order, mobile drive unit 20 moves order holder 40 to a position along the opposite side of inventory holder 50 . At various locations, mobile drive unit 20 may be slowed and/or stopped so that operators and/or automated equipment at inventory holders 50 may remove requested inventory items 42 from inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 And place it into the container 60 in the order holder 40 . In some embodiments, the operator of inventory holder 50 may be automated equipment and/or human personnel. As shown, order holder 40 may start at one end of inventory holder 50 and move along a side end until reaching the opposite end. In some embodiments, order holder 40 is movable directly along inventory holder 50 to a position at which inventory item 42 can be received. The order holder 40 can then move along the side of the inventory holder 50 after receiving the inventory item 42 (as indicated, for example, by the dashed arrow in FIG. 1 ) to where it can receive another inventory item 42 from the inventory holder 50 and/or A location from which another inventory item 42 may be removed. After accessing inventory holder 50 , order holder 40 may be shipped to other appropriate locations in inventory system 10 . For example, if the order in the order holder 40 is complete, the order holder 40 may be shipped to a shipping station.

管理模块15接收和/或生成请求,并可开始涉及移动驱动单元20、库存保持器30、货板保持器34、订单保持器40、库存物品42、库存支架50和/或库存系统10的其它元件的特定操作。管理模块15可选择库存系统10的组件来执行各种操作,并将命令、指令和/或其它适当的信息传递到所选择的组件,以促进完成这些操作。管理模块15可接收有关各种库存物品42的订单,且可协调和管理各种适当任务来填充订单。管理模块15可从任何适当系统或组件接收订单,且可替代或额外地生成任务且指派任务给库存系统10的各个组件。在特定实施方案中,管理模块15部分基于包括管理模块15从库存系统10的其它组件接收且/或从与管理模块15通信的外部组件接收的库存物品42的请求的订单生成任务指派。基于所述订单,管理模块15可识别要完成的涉及存储或要存储在库存系统10内的库存物品且可表示任何适当形式的通信的特定操作。例如,在特定实施方案中,订单可指定客户已购买且将从库存系统10中检索供客户装运用的特定库存物品42。Management module 15 receives and/or generates requests and may initiate other activities related to mobile drive units 20, inventory holders 30, pallet holders 34, order holders 40, inventory items 42, inventory holders 50, and/or inventory system 10. Element-specific operations. Management module 15 may select components of inventory system 10 to perform various operations and communicate commands, instructions, and/or other appropriate information to the selected components to facilitate completion of those operations. Management module 15 may receive orders for various inventory items 42 and may coordinate and manage various appropriate tasks to fill the orders. Management module 15 may receive orders from any suitable system or component, and may alternatively or additionally generate and assign tasks to various components of inventory system 10 . In particular embodiments, management module 15 is based in part on order generation task assignments that include requests for inventory items 42 that management module 15 receives from other components of inventory system 10 and/or from external components in communication with management module 15 . Based on the order, management module 15 may identify specific operations to be completed involving inventory items stored or to be stored within inventory system 10 and may represent any suitable form of communication. For example, in certain embodiments, an order may specify that a customer has purchased a particular inventory item 42 that will be retrieved from inventory system 10 for customer shipment.

在生成一个或多个任务指派之后,管理模块15选择适当组件来完成特定任务且将任务指派传输给所选组件以触发相关任务的完成。相关组件然后执行其指派的任务。每个任务指派定义特定组件要完成的一个或多个任务。这些任务可涉及库存物品的检索、存储、补充和计数和/或移动驱动单元20、库存保持器30、货板保持器34、订单保持器40、库存支架50和库存系统10的其它组件的管理。取决于组件和要完成的任务,特定任务指派可识别与对应任务相关联的位置、组件和/或动作以及/或完成指派任务相关的组件要使用的任何其它适当信息相关。After generating one or more task assignments, management module 15 selects the appropriate components to complete a particular task and communicates the task assignments to the selected components to trigger completion of the associated task. The relevant components then perform their assigned tasks. Each task assignment defines one or more tasks to be accomplished by a particular component. These tasks may involve retrieval, storage, replenishment, and counting of inventory items and/or management of mobile drive units 20, inventory holders 30, pallet holders 34, order holders 40, inventory holders 50, and other components of inventory system 10 . Depending on the component and the task to be accomplished, a particular task assignment may identify a location, component, and/or action associated with the corresponding task and/or any other appropriate information to be used by the component associated with the assigned task.

虽然库存系统10的适当组件完成指派任务,但是管理模块15可与相关组件交互以确保有效使用库存系统10可用的空间、设备、人力和其它资源。例如,管理组件15可从系统10的各个组件接收关于其当前位置、状态和/或其它特征的信息。基于知晓库存系统10的各个组件的其位置、当前状态和/或其它特征且知悉当前完成的任务,管理模块15可生成任务、系统资源的分配使用,且以系统级观点优化操作的方式另外引导个别组件完成的任务。此外,通过依赖于集中化、系统级管理和本地化、特定决策组件两者,库存系统10的特定实施方案可能够支持有效执行库存系统10的操作的各个方面的大量技术。While the appropriate components of inventory system 10 complete assigned tasks, management module 15 may interact with relevant components to ensure efficient use of the space, equipment, labor, and other resources available to inventory system 10 . For example, management component 15 may receive information from various components of system 10 regarding its current location, status, and/or other characteristics. Based on knowledge of the location, current status, and/or other characteristics of the various components of inventory system 10 and knowledge of currently completed tasks, management module 15 can generate tasks, allocate usage of system resources, and otherwise guide in a manner that optimizes operations from a system-level perspective Tasks performed by individual components. Furthermore, particular implementations of inventory system 10 may be capable of supporting a multitude of techniques for efficiently performing various aspects of inventory system 10 operations by relying on both centralized, system-level management and localized, specific decision-making components.

结果,通过实施下文所述的一个或多个管理技术,管理模块15的一些实施方案可增强库存系统10的效率且/或提供其它操作优点。例如,管理模块15可基于确定何时放置在库存支架50而确定安放在库存支架50处的特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34,可得以减少总体系统活动。类似地,管理模块15可将订单分组到订单保持器40中且指派任务以在库存支架50处履行订单使得优化订单履行活动。下文将参考图3-8讨论管理模块15的实例操作的更详细描述。As a result, some embodiments of management module 15 may enhance the efficiency of inventory system 10 and/or provide other operational advantages by implementing one or more of the management techniques described below. For example, management module 15 may determine specific inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to be placed at inventory holders 50 based on determining when to place them, which may reduce overall system activity. Similarly, management module 15 may group orders into order holders 40 and assign tasks to fulfill the orders at inventory holders 50 so that order fulfillment activities are optimized. A more detailed description of example operations of management module 15 is discussed below with reference to FIGS. 3-8 .

移动驱动单元20在与库存系统10相关联的工作间内的不同位置之间运送库存保持器30、货板保持器34和/或订单保持器40。基于库存保持器30、货板保持器34、订单保持器40和/或库存系统10的其它元件的特征和配置,移动驱动单元20可表示适于在库存系统10中使用的任何装置或组件。在库存系统10的特定实施方案中,移动驱动单元20表示独立的自供电机器人装置,其被配置来在所关联的工作间附近自由移动。在替代实施方案中,移动驱动单元20表示被跟踪的库存系统10的元件,其被配置来:沿遍历所关联的工作间的轨道、钢轨、线缆或其它引导元件来移动库存保持器30。在这种实施方案中,移动驱动单元20可通过与引导元件(诸如,电力钢轨)的连接来接收电力。在一些实施方案中,库存系统10可包括具有各种适当能力和规格的两个或多个不同各类型的移动驱动单元20。此外,虽然所示和讨论为移动驱动单元20为特定类型的移动驱动单元,但是移动驱动单元20可适当指各种类型的移动驱动单元。例如,一种类型的移动驱动单元20可操作以运送货板保持器34和/或相对大型、重型或块体库存物品42。另一类型的移动驱动单元20可操作以运送库存保持器30、订单保持器40和/或相对较轻且/或更紧凑的库存物品42。移动驱动单元20可因此具有各种传动系、负载容量和其它适当规格来在库存系统10内的各种库存保持器中运送特定库存物品42。Mobile drive unit 20 transports inventory holders 30 , pallet holders 34 , and/or order holders 40 between different locations within a work cell associated with inventory system 10 . Mobile drive unit 20 may represent any device or component suitable for use in inventory system 10 based on the characteristics and configuration of inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , order holder 40 , and/or other elements of inventory system 10 . In a particular embodiment of inventory system 10, mobile drive unit 20 represents an independent self-powered robotic device configured to move freely about an associated work cell. In an alternative embodiment, mobile drive unit 20 represents an element of tracked inventory system 10 configured to move inventory holder 30 along a track, rail, cable, or other guiding element traversing an associated bay. In such an embodiment, mobile drive unit 20 may receive electrical power through a connection to a guiding element, such as an electrical rail. In some embodiments, inventory system 10 may include two or more different types of mobile drive units 20 of various suitable capabilities and sizes. Furthermore, while mobile drive unit 20 is shown and discussed as being a particular type of mobile drive unit, mobile drive unit 20 may refer to various types of mobile drive units as appropriate. For example, one type of mobile drive unit 20 is operable to transport pallet holders 34 and/or relatively large, heavy, or bulk inventory items 42 . Another type of mobile drive unit 20 is operable to transport inventory holders 30 , order holders 40 , and/or relatively lighter and/or more compact inventory items 42 . Mobile drive units 20 may thus have various drive trains, load capacities, and other suitable specifications to transport particular inventory items 42 in various inventory holders within inventory system 10 .

移动驱动单元20可能够与管理模块15进行通信,以在操作期间接收识别所选择的库存保持器30的信息、传输移动驱动单元20的位置,或交换管理模块15或移动驱动单元20使用的任何其它适当的信息。移动驱动单元20可使用移动驱动单元20与管理模块15之间的有线连接和/或以任何其它适当的方式来与管理模块15进行无线通信。作为一个实例,移动驱动单元20的一些实施方案可使用Wi-Fi(IEEE 802.11)、蓝牙(IEEE 802.15)、红外数据协会标准或任何其它适当的无线通信协议来与管理模块15进行通信和/或彼此进行通信。作为另一实例,在被跟踪的库存系统10中,轨道或其它引导元件(移动驱动单元20在上面移动)可以是有线的,以促进移动驱动单元20与库存系统10的其它组件之间的通信。Mobile drive unit 20 may be capable of communicating with management module 15 to receive information identifying selected inventory holders 30 during operation, communicate the location of mobile drive unit 20 , or exchange any information used by management module 15 or mobile drive unit 20 . other appropriate information. Mobile drive unit 20 may communicate wirelessly with management module 15 using a wired connection between mobile drive unit 20 and management module 15 and/or in any other suitable manner. As an example, some embodiments of mobile drive unit 20 may communicate with management module 15 using Wi-Fi (IEEE 802.11), Bluetooth (IEEE 802.15), Infrared Data Association standards, or any other suitable wireless communication protocol and/or communicate with each other. As another example, in a tracked inventory system 10, rails or other guiding elements on which mobile drive unit 20 moves may be wired to facilitate communication between mobile drive unit 20 and other components of inventory system 10 .

库存保持器30存储库存物品42。在一些实施方案中,库存保持器30包括多个存储料箱,其中每个存储料箱能够保持不同类型的库存物品42。库存保持器30能够被移动驱动单元20承载、滚动或以其它方式移动。每个库存保持器30可具有多个表面,并且每个料箱可通过相关库存保持器30的具体表面临达。移动驱动单元20可被配置来在适当时间旋转库存保持器30,以向操作器或库存系统10的其它组件呈现库存保持器30和相关联的料箱的特定表面。图2更详细图示了库存保持器30的实例实施方案。The inventory holder 30 stores inventory items 42 . In some embodiments, inventory holder 30 includes multiple storage bins, where each storage bin is capable of holding a different type of inventory item 42 . Inventory holder 30 can be carried, rolled or otherwise moved by mobile drive unit 20 . Each inventory holder 30 may have multiple surfaces, and each bin may be accessed by a specific surface of the associated inventory holder 30 . Mobile drive unit 20 may be configured to rotate inventory holder 30 at appropriate times to present a particular surface of inventory holder 30 and associated bins to an operator or other component of inventory system 10 . FIG. 2 illustrates an example embodiment of inventory holder 30 in more detail.

货板保持器34表示可操作以存储库存物品42的货板的一种类型的库存保持器30。在一些实施方案中,货板保持器34能够被移动驱动单元20承载、滚动或以其它方式移动。货板保持器34可存储块体容器和/或高体积库存物品42。因此,在特定实施方案中,货板保持器34可包括具有单个SKU的大量库存物品42。在一些实施方案中,货板保持器34表示从特定库存物品42的批发商或经销商接收库存物品42时保持所述库存物品42的容器。因此,在一些模式的操作中,货板保持器34可响应于特定货板保持器34上的库存物品42的体积和/或速度直接从入口点移动到库存系统10中到库存支架50。The pallet holder 34 represents one type of inventory holder 30 operable to store pallets of inventory items 42 . In some embodiments, the pallet holder 34 can be carried, rolled, or otherwise moved by the mobile drive unit 20 . The pallet holders 34 may store bulk containers and/or high volume inventory items 42 . Thus, in certain embodiments, a pallet holder 34 may include a large number of inventory items 42 with a single SKU. In some embodiments, the pallet holder 34 represents a container that holds a particular inventory item 42 upon receipt from a wholesaler or distributor of the inventory item 42 . Accordingly, in some modes of operation, pallet holders 34 may be moved directly from entry points into inventory system 10 to inventory holders 50 in response to the volume and/or velocity of inventory items 42 on a particular pallet holder 34 .

垃圾保持器36存储垃圾和/或废料。垃圾保持器36可表示料箱、托架、容器或被配置来存储由库存支架50生成的普通类型的废料的其它结构,所述废料可由于库存支架50的操作而在库存支架50处生成。例如,在货板被拆解时,可从货板保持器34上的货板移除收缩包裹和/或其它废料。作为另一实例,在库存物品42用于填充订单时,可从封装或其它一次性容器移除个别库存物品42。在封装或其它一次性容器为空时,其可被放置到垃圾保持器36中作废弃用。在一些实施方案中,垃圾保持器36可被配置使得其可由移动驱动单元20运送。如下文参考图2更详细说明,垃圾保持器36可以与库存保持器30类似的方式与移动驱动单元介接。有时,管理模块15可指示移动驱动单元20中的一个以将垃圾保持器36运离要搬空的库存支架50。Trash holder 36 stores trash and/or waste materials. Waste holder 36 may represent a bin, rack, container, or other structure configured to store common types of waste material generated by inventory holder 50 that may be generated at inventory holder 50 as a result of its operation. For example, shrink wrap and/or other waste may be removed from the pallets on the pallet holders 34 as the pallets are disassembled. As another example, individual inventory items 42 may be removed from packages or other disposable containers as the inventory items 42 are used to fill an order. When the package or other disposable container is empty, it can be placed into the waste holder 36 for disposal. In some embodiments, waste holder 36 may be configured such that it is transportable by mobile drive unit 20 . As described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 2 , the waste holder 36 may interface with the mobile drive unit in a similar manner as the inventory holder 30 . From time to time, the management module 15 may instruct one of the mobile drive units 20 to move the waste holder 36 away from the inventory holder 50 to be emptied.

订单保持器40保持容器60组,在其中可将库存物品42封装到订单。容器60可被配置来存储有关各种库存物品42的订单。订单保持器40可具有任何适当的结构,并被配置来基于在库存系统10中利用的容器60的类型或任何其它适当的因素而以任何适当的方式存储容器60。在一些实施方案中,订单保持器40表示一种类型的库存保持器30,其被配置来承载货板,并且可被移动驱动单元20移动。订单保持器40可包括其上搁置容器60的一个或多个平台或货架。额外地或替代地,订单保持器40可包括多个料箱,每个料箱保持不同大小或类型的容器60。订单保持器40和/或容器60可被指定用于装运到远端位置,诸如装运目的地。容器60表示任何适当形式的容器,可将库存物品42放置在所述容器中或其上,以用于存储、装运或其它适当的目的。容器60的实例包括但不限于箱、货板、料箱、纸板箱和封套。在特定实施方案中,容器60独立于存储容器60的订单保持器40,且因此,容器60可从订单保持器40移除以供处理或被传送到其它订单保持器40。作为一个实例,容器60可表示箱或货板,在所述箱中或所述货板上,与特定订单相关联的库存物品42可被存储用于递送,并且相关的容器60可然后被装运给与所述订单相关联的客户。作为另一实例,容器60可表示料箱或其它容器,其中库存物品42可被放置用于长期存储,且然后被移动到装运位置或从库存系统10移除。图2更详细图示了订单保持器40和容器60的实例实施方案。下文参考图2更详细讨论移动驱动单元20、库存保持器30和订单保持器40的更详细实例。The order holder 40 holds a set of containers 60 in which inventory items 42 can be packaged into orders. Container 60 may be configured to store orders for various inventory items 42 . Order holder 40 may have any suitable structure and be configured to store containers 60 in any suitable manner based on the type of containers 60 utilized in inventory system 10 or any other suitable factor. In some embodiments, order holder 40 represents a type of inventory holder 30 configured to carry pallets and movable by mobile drive unit 20 . Order holder 40 may include one or more platforms or shelves on which containers 60 rest. Additionally or alternatively, order holder 40 may include multiple bins, each holding a different size or type of container 60 . Order holder 40 and/or container 60 may be designated for shipment to a remote location, such as a shipping destination. Container 60 represents any suitable form of container in or on which inventory item 42 may be placed for storage, shipping, or other suitable purpose. Examples of containers 60 include, but are not limited to, boxes, pallets, bins, cartons, and envelopes. In particular embodiments, the containers 60 are separate from the order holder 40 that stores the containers 60 , and thus, the containers 60 may be removed from the order holder 40 for processing or transferred to other order holders 40 . As an example, container 60 may represent a case or pallet in which inventory items 42 associated with a particular order may be stored for delivery and the associated container 60 may then be shipped to the customer associated with said order. As another example, container 60 may represent a bin or other container in which inventory items 42 may be placed for long-term storage and then moved to a shipping location or removed from inventory system 10 . FIG. 2 illustrates an example embodiment of order holder 40 and container 60 in more detail. More detailed examples of mobile drive unit 20 , inventory holder 30 , and order holder 40 are discussed in greater detail below with reference to FIG. 2 .

库存物品42表示适于在自动化库存系统10内存储、检索和/或处理的任何物体。为了该描述的目的,“库存物品”可表示存储在库存系统10的特定类型的任何一个或多个物体。例如,给定库存物品42可表示唯一库存物品的单个库存单元(SKU)。因此,库存物品42可指特定物品且/或可指适当具有特定SKU的物品量。作为一个实例,库存系统10可表示为零售设施存储块体库存物品42的零售分配仓库,诸如杂货店和/或商品仓库。作为另一实例,库存系统10可表示邮购仓库设施,并且库存物品42可表示存储在仓库设施中的商品。在操作期间,移动驱动单元20可检索库存保持器30,其包含在将被包装以递送给客户的订单中请求的一个或多个库存物品42。此外,在库存系统10的特定实施方案中,包含完成订单的箱自身可表示库存物品。Inventory item 42 represents any object suitable for storage, retrieval, and/or processing within automated inventory system 10 . For purposes of this description, an "inventory item" may refer to any one or more objects of a particular type stored in inventory system 10 . For example, a given inventory item 42 may represent a single stock keeping unit (SKU) of a unique inventory item. Accordingly, an inventory item 42 may refer to a specific item and/or may refer to a quantity of an item suitably having a specific SKU. As one example, inventory system 10 may represent a retail distribution warehouse that stores bulk inventory items 42 for a retail facility, such as a grocery store and/or a merchandise warehouse. As another example, inventory system 10 may represent a mail-order warehouse facility, and inventory items 42 may represent merchandise stored in the warehouse facility. During operation, mobile drive unit 20 may retrieve inventory holder 30 containing one or more inventory items 42 requested in an order to be packaged for delivery to a customer. Furthermore, in certain embodiments of inventory system 10, the boxes containing completed orders may themselves represent inventory items.

库存站50表示供处理或操纵库存物品42的任何适当的组件,诸如用于监测库存物品42在库存系统10的流入和流出的扫描仪、用于与管理模块15进行通信的通信接口和/或任何其它适当的组件。库存支架50包括若干限定区域80,在其处可安放库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。布置库存支架50使得订单保持器40可操作以从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的限定区域80沿相对侧移动。沿库存支架50移动的订单保持器40可从操作人员和/或自动化设备中接收库存物品42。库存支架50处的操作人员和/或自动化设备可操作以从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34移除库存物品42且将其移动到订单保持器40中的适当容器60中。库存支架50可因此包括适当显示装置和/或发信号设备以指示操作器哪个库存物品42将被放置到哪个容器60中。另外或替代地,库存支架50可包括一个或多个指示器,其在启动时为操作器提供期望特定订单保持器40停在何处且/或沿库存支架50减慢以接收特定库存物品42的指示。指示器可以是任何适当音频和/或视频发信号装置,诸如显示接口、灯、激光或能够提供信息给库存支架50的操作器的其它适当装置。Inventory station 50 represents any suitable component for processing or manipulating inventory items 42, such as scanners for monitoring the inflow and outflow of inventory items 42 in inventory system 10, communication interfaces for communicating with management module 15, and/or any other appropriate components. Inventory holder 50 includes a number of defined areas 80 where inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be seated. The inventory holder 50 is arranged such that the order holder 40 is operable to move along opposite sides from the defined area 80 of the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 . Order holders 40 moving along inventory racks 50 may receive inventory items 42 from human operators and/or automated equipment. Operators and/or automated equipment at inventory holder 50 are operable to remove inventory items 42 from inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 and move them into appropriate containers 60 in order holders 40 . The inventory holder 50 may thus include appropriate display and/or signaling devices to instruct the operator which inventory item 42 is to be placed into which container 60 . Additionally or alternatively, the inventory holder 50 may include one or more indicators that, upon activation, provide the operator with where to expect a particular order holder 40 to stop and/or slow down along the inventory holder 50 to receive a particular inventory item 42 instructions. The indicator may be any suitable audio and/or visual signaling device, such as a display interface, light, laser, or other suitable device capable of providing information to the operator of inventory holder 50 .

库存支架50可被操作人员完全或部分地控制,或可全自动化。此外,库存支架50的操作人员或自动化操作器可能够对库存物品42执行某些任务(诸如对库存物品42进行包装或计数)作为库存系统10的操作的部分。库存支架50可分成对应于每个操作器的适当数量的工作区。操作器可在每个工作区内工作。工作区可由管理模块15用于平衡且/或协调库存支架50处的指派。例如,库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34可基于在各个区中间平衡库存物品42的相对速度而被指派给工作区。作为另一实例,库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34可基于在各个区中间平衡库存物品42的随机速度而被指派给工作区。库存支架50可包括一个或多个抬高和/或扁平的表面,其被配置来促进操作器与库存保持器30、货板保持器34、垃圾保持器36和/或订单保持器40互动。此外或是替代地,库存支架50可表示指定用于本文所述的一个或多个活动的工作间的区域。因此,库存支架50可表示在其处进行本公开所述的活动的库存系统10的虚拟区域。限定库存支架50的虚拟区域可虚拟地约束被指定用于本文所述活动的两个或多个侧,包括在一侧上定位库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34且/或将订单保持器40移动到沿相对侧的位置。管理模块15可限定且/或被编程来与指定为库存支架50的工作间的虚拟区域互动。Inventory holder 50 may be fully or partially controlled by an operator, or may be fully automated. Additionally, human operators or automated operators of inventory holders 50 may be able to perform certain tasks on inventory items 42 , such as packing or counting inventory items 42 as part of the operation of inventory system 10 . Inventory holder 50 may be divided into an appropriate number of work areas for each operator. Manipulators can work in each work area. Workspaces may be used by management module 15 to balance and/or coordinate assignments at inventory holders 50 . For example, inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be assigned to work zones based on the relative speed at which inventory items 42 are balanced among the various zones. As another example, inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be assigned to work zones based on a random velocity at which inventory items 42 are balanced among the various zones. Inventory holder 50 may include one or more raised and/or flat surfaces configured to facilitate operator interaction with inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , waste holder 36 , and/or order holder 40 . Additionally or alternatively, inventory holder 50 may represent an area of a workshop designated for one or more of the activities described herein. Accordingly, inventory holder 50 may represent a virtual area of inventory system 10 at which the activities described in this disclosure take place. The virtual area defining inventory holder 50 can virtually bound two or more sides designated for the activities described herein, including positioning inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 on one side and/or placing orders The holder 40 is moved into position along the opposite side. Management module 15 may define and/or be programmed to interact with a virtual area of a bay designated as inventory holder 50 .

限定区域80可表示邻近库存支架50的空间,在其处可在库存支架50处填充订单时定位库存保持器30、货板保持器34和/或垃圾保持器36。限定区域80可具有对应于库存保持器30、货板保持器34和/或垃圾保持器36的尺寸的面积。限定区域80可表示沿库存支架50的一侧定位的固定位置。限定区域80可表示由管理模块15限定的虚拟空间。应注意,虽然图示为在尺寸上大体彼此类似的连续空间,但是限定区域80可具有不同尺寸且/或可相对于库存支架50被定位在任何适当位置中。例如,限定区域80可具有取决于库存保持器30、货板保持器34和/或垃圾保持器36的各自尺寸而不同的尺寸。因此,在一些实施方案中,限定区域80可具有指定用于特定类型保持器的不同类型。在其它实施方案中,限定区域80可定尺寸使得其大体上可在位于库存支架50处的不同类型的保持器之间互换。在一些实施方案中,限定区域80可简单表示沿库存支架50中保存用于放置保持器30、货板保持器34和/或垃圾保持器36的侧的区域。Defined area 80 may represent a space adjacent inventory holder 50 where inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , and/or waste holder 36 may be positioned when order is filled at inventory holder 50 . The defined area 80 may have an area corresponding to the dimensions of the inventory holder 30 , the pallet holder 34 and/or the waste holder 36 . Defined area 80 may represent a fixed location positioned along a side of inventory holder 50 . The defined area 80 may represent a virtual space defined by the management module 15 . It should be noted that while illustrated as contiguous spaces that are generally similar in size to one another, defined area 80 may be of different dimensions and/or may be positioned in any suitable position relative to inventory holder 50 . For example, defined area 80 may have different dimensions depending on the respective dimensions of inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , and/or waste holder 36 . Thus, in some embodiments, defined area 80 may be of different types designated for a particular type of retainer. In other embodiments, defined area 80 may be sized such that it is generally interchangeable between different types of holders located at inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, the defined area 80 may simply represent the area along the sides of the inventory holder 50 reserved for placement of the holders 30 , pallet holders 34 , and/or waste holders 36 .

一般而言,使用库存支架50填充库存物品42的订单。可基于库存物品42的需求由管理模块15将库存物品42、库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34指派到库存支架50。可通过将承载用于订单的各个容器60的订单保持器40运送到库存支架50而填充各个库存物品42的订单,其中订单的库存物品42可被放置到容器60中。在一些实施方案中,订单保持器40可在从库存支架50接收库存物品32之前和/或之后从其它类型的库存站接收库存物品32。如下文详细说明,在访问库存支架50之后,订单保持器40可被运送到库存站以接收额外物品且/或被运送到装运站用于装运到另一设施或终端用户。下文将参考图3-8讨论库存系统10的操作的详细实例。特定而言,下文参考图5讨论用于促进库存支架50处的订单履行的技术,且下文还参考图6-8讨论用于选择高速度和/或高体积库存安放在库存支架50以及用于将各个订单分组成订单保持器40的额外技术。In general, inventory holders 50 are used to fill orders for inventory items 42 . Inventory items 42 , inventory holders 30 , and/or pallet holders 34 may be assigned to inventory holders 50 by management module 15 based on the demand for inventory items 42 . Orders for individual inventory items 42 may be filled by shipping order holders 40 carrying individual containers 60 for the order to inventory holders 50 into which the order's inventory items 42 may be placed. In some embodiments, order holder 40 may receive inventory items 32 from other types of inventory stations before and/or after receiving inventory items 32 from inventory holders 50 . As detailed below, after accessing inventory holder 50, order holder 40 may be transported to an inventory station to receive additional items and/or to a shipping station for shipment to another facility or end user. Detailed examples of the operation of inventory system 10 are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 3-8 . In particular, techniques for facilitating order fulfillment at inventory holder 50 are discussed below with reference to FIG. An additional technique for grouping individual orders into order holders 40 .

图2图示能够使用库存支架50填充库存系统的各个组件的侧视图。特定而言,图2图示从库存存储48将库存保持器30运送到库存支架50的特定移动驱动单元20。另一移动驱动单元20将含有订单的各个容器60的订单保持器40运送到库存支架50。如所示,从可以是一种在订单保持器40上布置容器60的类型的站的订单引导站54运送订单保持器40。在库存支架50处,从库存保持器30移除库存物品42且将其放置到订单保持器40的适当容器60中。订单保持器40可沿着库存支架50的侧被移动到另一位置以接收另一库存物品42或可移动到库存系统10中的另一适当位置。FIG. 2 illustrates a side view of various components of an inventory system that can be populated using inventory holders 50 . In particular, FIG. 2 illustrates a particular mobile drive unit 20 transporting inventory holders 30 from inventory storage 48 to inventory holders 50 . Another mobile drive unit 20 transports the order holder 40 containing the individual containers 60 of the order to the inventory holder 50 . As shown, order holders 40 are shipped from order induction station 54 , which may be a type of station in which containers 60 are disposed on order holders 40 . At inventory holder 50 , inventory items 42 are removed from inventory holder 30 and placed into appropriate containers 60 of order holder 40 . Order holder 40 may be moved to another location along the side of inventory holder 50 to receive another inventory item 42 or may be moved to another suitable location in inventory system 10 .

移动驱动单元20可通过对接和/或耦合到特定保持器且在对接时移动保持器而运送库存保持器30、货板保持器34和/或订单保持器40。例如,如所示,移动驱动单元20分别运送库存保持器30和订单保持器40。出于简化的原因,更详细描述库存保持器30的运送,但是以下描述可类似地应用到货板保持器34和/或订单保持器40的一些实施方案。移动驱动单元20通过在库存保持器30下方移动且抬升介接库存保持器30的部分的对接头而运送库存保持器30。对接头可由可操作以在对接时抬升库存保持器30的移动驱动单元20的致动器控制。移动驱动单元20的对接头可将移动驱动单元20耦合到库存保持器30且/或在将移动驱动单元20对接到库存保持器30时支撑库存保持器30。移动驱动单元20可诸如通过以任何其它适当方式抬升库存保持器30、推动库存保持器30、旋转库存保持器30和/或移动库存保持器30利用对接头以操纵库存保持器30。移动驱动单元20的对接头还可包括任何适当组件组合以促进库存保持器30的这种操纵。例如,在一些实施方案中,高摩擦部分可形成对接头的所有或部分,所述对接头在移动驱动单元20对接到库存保持器30时邻接库存保持器30的部分。在这些实施方案中,当移动驱动单元20致动对接头时,在对接头的高摩擦部分与库存保持器30的表面之间的摩擦力可引发库存保持器30的平移和旋转移动。Mobile drive unit 20 may transport inventory holder 30 , pallet holder 34 , and/or order holder 40 by docking and/or coupling to a particular holder and moving the holder when docked. For example, as shown, mobile drive unit 20 transports inventory holder 30 and order holder 40 , respectively. For reasons of simplicity, the shipping of the inventory holder 30 is described in more detail, but the following description applies similarly to some embodiments of the pallet holder 34 and/or order holder 40 . The mobile drive unit 20 transports the inventory holder 30 by moving under the inventory holder 30 and lifting the docking head that interfaces the portion of the inventory holder 30 . The docking head may be controlled by an actuator of mobile drive unit 20 operable to lift inventory holder 30 when docked. The docking joint of mobile drive unit 20 may couple mobile drive unit 20 to inventory holder 30 and/or support inventory holder 30 when mobile drive unit 20 is docked to inventory holder 30 . Mobile drive unit 20 may manipulate inventory holder 30 using a docking head, such as by lifting inventory holder 30 , pushing inventory holder 30 , rotating inventory holder 30 , and/or moving inventory holder 30 in any other suitable manner. The docking head of mobile drive unit 20 may also include any suitable combination of components to facilitate such manipulation of inventory holder 30 . For example, in some embodiments, the high friction portion may form all or part of a docking head that abuts a portion of inventory holder 30 when mobile drive unit 20 is docked thereto. In these embodiments, when mobile drive unit 20 actuates the docking head, friction between the high friction portion of the docking head and the surface of inventory holder 30 may induce translational and rotational movement of inventory holder 30 .

在一些实施方案中,当移动和/或当停止时,移动驱动单元20可能够旋转其对接头以旋转库存保持器30。另外或替代地,移动驱动单元20可能够独立地旋转对接头或整体上作为移动驱动单元20的移动的部分。例如,移动驱动单元20可随着移动驱动单元20执行转弯时旋转库存保持器30,使得库存保持器30继续面对移动的初始方向。当抬升时,移动驱动单元20可控制另一致动器或驱动电力到其轮子的致动器。使用轮子驱动器,移动驱动单元20可能够在对接头抬升库存保持器30时或在移动驱动单元与库存保持器30未对接且/或从其解耦时运送库存保持器30。如所示,除了由一个或多个致动器供电的机动轮之外,移动驱动单元20包括一对稳定器轮。In some embodiments, mobile drive unit 20 may be capable of rotating its docking head to rotate inventory holder 30 when moving and/or when stationary. Additionally or alternatively, mobile drive unit 20 may be capable of rotating the docking head independently or as a whole as part of the movement of mobile drive unit 20 . For example, mobile drive unit 20 may rotate inventory holder 30 as mobile drive unit 20 performs a turn such that inventory holder 30 continues to face the original direction of movement. When lifting, the mobile drive unit 20 may control another actuator or an actuator that drives power to its wheels. Using wheel drives, mobile drive unit 20 may be capable of transporting inventory holder 30 when docked to lift inventory holder 30 or when mobile drive unit is undocked and/or decoupled from inventory holder 30 . As shown, mobile drive unit 20 includes a pair of stabilizer wheels in addition to motorized wheels powered by one or more actuators.

应注意,虽然图示了与库存保持器30的特定对接方法,但是移动驱动单元20可通过以任何其它方式连接到库存保持器30、抬升所述库存保持器30和/或以其它方式与其互动而与库存保持器30对接,使得当对接时,移动驱动单元20耦合到库存保持器30且/或支撑所述库存保持器30且可移动库存保持器30。虽然以下描述关注被配置来以特定方式对接的移动驱动单元20和库存保持器30的特定实施方案,但是移动驱动单元20和库存保持器30的替代实施方案可被配置来以适于容许移动驱动单元20在库存系统10内移动库存保持器30的任何方式对接。此外,如下文所述,在特定实施方案中,移动驱动单元20表示库存保持器30的所有或部分。在这些实施方案中,移动驱动单元20可在运送库存保持器30之前不与库存保持器30对接且移动驱动单元20每个可维持与特定库存保持器30持续对接。It should be noted that while a particular method of docking with inventory holder 30 is illustrated, mobile drive unit 20 may be connected to inventory holder 30 in any other manner, lift said inventory holder 30, and/or otherwise interact with it. Rather, it is docked with the inventory holder 30 such that when docked, the mobile drive unit 20 is coupled to the inventory holder 30 and/or supports the inventory holder 30 and can move the inventory holder 30 . Although the following description focuses on a particular implementation of mobile drive unit 20 and inventory holder 30 configured to interface in a particular manner, alternative implementations of mobile drive unit 20 and inventory holder 30 may be configured to accommodate mobile drive Unit 20 interfaces with any manner of moving inventory holders 30 within inventory system 10 . Additionally, mobile drive unit 20 represents all or a portion of inventory holder 30 in certain embodiments, as described below. In these embodiments, mobile drive units 20 may not be docked with inventory holder 30 until inventory holder 30 is shipped and mobile drive units 20 may each remain continuously docked with a particular inventory holder 30 .

图3图示能够使用库存支架50填充订单的库存系统10的另一实例实施方案的顶视图。库存系统10包括上文参考图1和图2所述的被布置在工作间中的各个元件。除了上述库存支架50之外,库存系统10包括存储在库存存储48中的各个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。库存系统10还包括一个或多个站,诸如接收站52、引导站54、库存站56和/或装运站58。一般而言,通过将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50和各个其它站填充库存系统10内的库存物品42的订单。安放在库存支架50处的库存物品42可用于完成和/或促成订单。此外或是替代地,订单保持器40可被运送到库存站56以接收库存保持器30中的额外库存物品42,其中库存保持器30可由移动驱动单元20运送到库存站56且/或具有比其它库存物品42更高的立方体积。因此,虽然高体积库存物品42的量可小于相对高速度物品42的量,但是高体积库存物品42的总体积可高于具有较高速度的库存物品。FIG. 3 illustrates a top view of another example embodiment of an inventory system 10 capable of filling orders using inventory holders 50 . Inventory system 10 includes the various elements described above with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 arranged in a booth. In addition to the inventory holders 50 described above, the inventory system 10 includes various inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 stored in the inventory storage 48 . Inventory system 10 also includes one or more stations, such as receiving station 52 , induction station 54 , inventory station 56 , and/or shipping station 58 . In general, orders for inventory items 42 within inventory system 10 are filled by shipping order holders 40 to inventory racks 50 and various other stations. Inventory items 42 deposited at inventory holders 50 may be used to fulfill and/or facilitate orders. In addition or alternatively, order holder 40 can be transported to inventory station 56 to receive additional inventory item 42 in inventory holder 30, wherein inventory holder 30 can be transported to inventory station 56 by mobile drive unit 20 and/or has ratio Other inventory items 42 higher cubic volume. Thus, while the quantity of high volume inventory items 42 may be less than the quantity of relatively high velocity items 42 , the total volume of high volume inventory items 42 may be higher than inventory items having higher velocities.

库存系统10可表示任何适当类型的订单履行设施。例如,库存系统10可表示邮购仓库,连锁零售商店的分布中心、制造设施或可利用库存系统来管理库存和/或履行订单的任何其它设施。在许多实施方案中,以不同订单速率下单库存物品42。因此,以比其它库存物品42高得多的频率下单一些库存物品42。同样,可以比其它库存物品42高得多的量下单一些库存物品42。Inventory system 10 may represent any suitable type of order fulfillment facility. For example, inventory system 10 may represent a mail order warehouse, a distribution center for a chain retail store, a manufacturing facility, or any other facility that may utilize an inventory system to manage inventory and/or fulfill orders. In many embodiments, inventory items 42 are ordered at different order rates. Therefore, some inventory items 42 are ordered at a much higher frequency than other inventory items 42 . Likewise, some inventory items 42 may be ordered in much higher quantities than other inventory items 42 .

接收站52、引导站54、库存站56和装运站58表示包括用于处理或处置库存物品42的任何适当组件的站,诸如用于监测库存物品42在远库存系统10的流入和流出的扫描仪、用于与管理模块15进行通信的通信接口和/或任何其它适当的组件。站表示指定用于完成涉及库存物品的特定任务的位置。这些任务可包括从库存保持器30移除库存物品,将库存物品引导到库存保持器30,计数库存保持器30中的库存物品,拆解库存物品(例如,从货板或箱大小的组到个别库存物品),和/或以任何其它适当方式处理或处置库存物品。在一些实施方案中,站可只表示其中可在库存系统10内完成涉及库存物品的特定任务的物理位置。替代地或是另外,站均可表示物理位置以及用于处理或处置库存物品的任何适当设备,诸如用于监测库存物品在库存系统10的流入和流出的扫描仪、用于与管理模块15进行通信的通信接口和/或任何其它适当的组件。站可完全或部分地由操作人员控制,或可全自动化。在一些实施方案中,操作器可以是自动化设备。此外,库存支架50的操作人员或自动化操作器可能够对库存物品执行某些任务(诸如对库存物品进行包装或计数)作为库存系统10的操作的部分。此外,库存支架50的操作人员或自动化操作器可能够对库存物品42执行某些任务(诸如对库存物品42进行包装或计数)作为库存系统10的操作的部分。接收站52、引导站54、库存站56和装运站58表示适于执行库存系统10支持的特定类型的处理任务的专业化站。然而,一般而言,一些实施方案库存系统10可包括库存站,所述库存站能够处置多个类型的任务,但在任何给定的时间,其被配置来只处理一种特定类型的任务。Receiving station 52 , induction station 54 , inventory station 56 , and shipping station 58 represent stations that include any suitable components for handling or disposing of inventory items 42 , such as scans for monitoring the inflow and outflow of inventory items 42 at remote inventory system 10 . instrument, a communication interface for communicating with the management module 15, and/or any other suitable components. A station represents a location designated for completing a specific task involving an inventory item. These tasks may include removing inventory items from inventory holders 30, directing inventory items to inventory holders 30, counting inventory items in inventory holders 30, dismantling inventory items (e.g., from pallet or case-sized groups to Individual Inventory Items), and/or handle or dispose of Inventory Items in any other appropriate manner. In some embodiments, a station may simply refer to a physical location where a particular task involving an inventory item may be completed within inventory system 10 . Alternatively or in addition, a station may represent a physical location and any suitable equipment for handling or disposing of inventory items, such as scanners for monitoring the inflow and outflow of inventory items in the inventory system 10, for communicating with the management module 15 communication interface and/or any other suitable components for communication. A station may be fully or partially controlled by an operator, or may be fully automated. In some embodiments, the operator can be an automated device. Additionally, human operators or automated operators of inventory holders 50 may be able to perform certain tasks on inventory items, such as packing or counting inventory items, as part of the operation of inventory system 10 . Additionally, human operators or automated operators of inventory holders 50 may be able to perform certain tasks on inventory items 42 , such as packing or counting inventory items 42 as part of the operation of inventory system 10 . Receiving station 52, induction station 54, inventory station 56, and shipping station 58 represent specialized stations adapted to perform the particular type of processing task that inventory system 10 supports. In general, however, some embodiments inventory system 10 may include inventory stations that are capable of handling multiple types of jobs, but are configured to handle only one particular type of job at any given time.

接收站52表示在其处进行与接收补充和/或取代库存物品42相关联的任务的站。例如,接收站52可包括装货台和适当处理设备以将新库存物品42纳入库存系统10中。在接收站52处,可接收、拆解、处置新库存,且将其送入库存系统10中,以及/或与接收库存物品42到库存系统10中的任何其它适当任务。Receiving station 52 represents a station at which tasks associated with receiving replenished and/or replaced inventory items 42 are performed. For example, receiving station 52 may include loading bays and appropriate handling equipment to incorporate new inventory items 42 into inventory system 10 . At receiving station 52 , new inventory may be received, disassembled, disposed of, and sent into inventory system 10 , and/or any other appropriate task associated with receiving inventory items 42 into inventory system 10 .

引导站54表示在其处进行与为库存物品装配和/或组建订单保持器40且/或装配容器60的任务的站。例如,引导站54可包括装配容器60且/或将容器60分组到订单保持器40中的适当材料及设备。引导站54处的接口可提供任何适当组件用于装配容器60,诸如包装清单、包装材料、装运标签和与其它适当装运和包装任务相关的材料。在一些实施方案中,引导站54可包括适当装置和/或接口以指示引导站54的操作器如何装配容器60且/或将容器60分组到订单保持器40中。例如,给定订单可包括若干库存物品42。可为操作器提供使用哪个型号的容器60且将容器60放置到哪个订单保持器40中的指示。特定容器60可与引导至54处的特定订单相关联。因此,当容器60接收库存物品42时,“订单”可指同样或替代地接收库存物品42。Induction station 54 represents a station at which tasks related to assembling and/or building order holders 40 for inventory items and/or assembling containers 60 are performed. For example, induction station 54 may include appropriate materials and equipment to assemble and/or group containers 60 into order holders 40 . The interface at the guidance station 54 may provide any suitable components for assembling the container 60, such as packing slips, packaging materials, shipping labels, and materials related to other appropriate shipping and packaging tasks. In some embodiments, induction station 54 may include appropriate devices and/or interfaces to instruct operators of induction station 54 how to assemble containers 60 and/or group containers 60 into order holders 40 . For example, a given order may include a number of inventory items 42 . An indication may be provided to the operator which model of container 60 to use and into which order holder 40 to place the container 60 . A particular container 60 may be associated with a particular order directed to 54 . Thus, an "order" may refer to receiving inventory items 42 as well or alternatively when container 60 receives inventory items 42 .

除了库存支架50之外或替代库存支架50,库存站56表示在其处进行与履行订单的任务的站。在库存站56,可挑选库存物品42且/或将其放置到订单保持器40的容器60中。库存站56可包括适当设备以指示操作器从库存保持器30移除特定库存物品42且将库存物品42放置到订单保持器40的容器60中。在一些实施方案中,库存站56可与能够将容器60运送到装运站58用于装运的运输设备介接。因此,当完成特定订单时,可从订单保持器40移除其相关联容器60且将其放置到运输设备上用于递送到装运站58。此外或是替代地,移动驱动单元20可移动订单保持器40原理库存站56且将订单保持器40运送到装运站58。In addition to or instead of inventory holder 50, inventory station 56 represents a station at which tasks related to fulfilling orders are performed. At inventory station 56 , inventory items 42 may be picked and/or placed into containers 60 of order holder 40 . The inventory station 56 may include appropriate equipment to instruct an operator to remove a particular inventory item 42 from the inventory holder 30 and to place the inventory item 42 into the container 60 of the order holder 40 . In some embodiments, inventory station 56 may interface with a transport device capable of transporting container 60 to shipping station 58 for shipping. Thus, when a particular order is completed, its associated container 60 may be removed from the order holder 40 and placed on a transport device for delivery to the shipping station 58 . Additionally or alternatively, mobile drive unit 20 may move order holder 40 out of inventory station 56 and transport order holder 40 to shipping station 58 .

装运站58表示在其处可将订单装运到目的地的位置,诸如订单的终端用户和/或专用装运目的地。例如,装运站58可包括装货台和适当处理设备以从库存系统10装运容器60。在一些实施方案中,装运站58和接收站52可在类似或相同位置。Shipping station 58 represents a location at which an order may be shipped to a destination, such as an end user and/or a dedicated shipping destination for the order. For example, shipping station 58 may include loading bays and appropriate handling equipment to ship containers 60 from inventory system 10 . In some embodiments, the shipping station 58 and the receiving station 52 may be in similar or identical locations.

在操作时,使用库存支架50填充库存系统10内的库存物品42的订单。随着在接收站52处将库存接收到库存系统10中,可将补充库存系统10的库存物品42的货板放置到货板保持器34上且/或放置到库存保持器30中。可由移动驱动单元20沿库存支架50将所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34移动到限定区域80。安放在限定区域80处的库存保持器30和货板保持器34可保持相对高速度和/或高体积的库存物品42。In operation, inventory holders 50 are used to fill orders for inventory items 42 within inventory system 10 . As inventory is received into inventory system 10 at receiving station 52 , pallets of inventory items 42 that replenish inventory system 10 may be placed onto pallet holders 34 and/or into inventory holders 30 . Selected inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be moved along inventory holder 50 to defined area 80 by mobile drive unit 20 . The inventory holders 30 and pallet holders 34 positioned at the defined area 80 may hold relatively high velocity and/or high volume inventory items 42 .

随着库存系统10接收订单,以引导站54处的适当容器60装配订单保持器40。移动驱动单元沿库存支架50移动订单保持器40以沿库存支架50接收由限定区域80处的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34存储的库存物品42。如果在访问库存支架50之后完成特定订单保持器40上的订单,那么可将订单保持器40移动到装运站58。如果订单未完成,那么可由移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40移动到一个或多个库存站56。作为实例,如果订单包括未存储在库存支架50处的一个或多个相对较不受欢迎且/或低体积的物品,那么在访问库存支架50之后可能并未完成订单保持器40中的订单。在库存站56处,保持订单保持器40中的订单请求的特定库存物品42的特定库存保持器30可通过移动驱动单元20从库存存储48运送到库存站56。在挑选站56处完成订单之后,订单保持器40可被运送到装运站58。应注意,虽然所示实例示出移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40从引导站54运送到库存支架50,但是这并非是必需的情况。在一些实施方案中,移动驱动单元20可在将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50之前将给定订单保持器40运送到系统10内的一个或多个库存站56或其它位置。As the inventory system 10 receives the order, the order holder 40 is assembled with the appropriate container 60 at the lead station 54 . The mobile drive unit moves the order holders 40 along the inventory holder 50 to receive the inventory items 42 stored by the inventory holders 30 and/or the pallet holders 34 at the defined area 80 along the inventory holder 50 . If the order on a particular order holder 40 is completed after accessing the inventory holder 50 , the order holder 40 may be moved to the shipping station 58 . If the order is not fulfilled, order holder 40 may be moved by mobile drive unit 20 to one or more inventory stations 56 . As an example, if the order includes one or more relatively unpopular and/or low-volume items not stored at inventory holder 50, the order in order holder 40 may not be completed after accessing inventory holder 50. At the inventory station 56 , the particular inventory holder 30 holding the particular inventory item 42 of the order request in the order holder 40 may be transported by the mobile drive unit 20 from the inventory store 48 to the inventory station 56 . After the order is completed at picking station 56 , order holder 40 may be shipped to shipping station 58 . It should be noted that while the illustrated example shows mobile drive unit 20 transporting order holder 40 from guidance station 54 to inventory holder 50 , this is not required to be the case. In some embodiments, mobile drive unit 20 may transport a given order holder 40 to one or more inventory stations 56 or other locations within system 10 prior to transporting order holder 40 to inventory rack 50 .

管理模块15可指派库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34到库存支架50处的限定区域80。管理模块15可指定特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34安放到库存支架50的限定区域80处。所述指定可基于且/或响应于分别存储于库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的库存物品42的产品速度和/或体积。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可检验库存系统10内的各个订单以确定库存物品42的最佳组合以存储在库存支架50处。在一些实施方案中,最佳组合可基于确定可在具有特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的库存支架50处完成订单的最高总量。例如,如果纸张和墨盒分别是最高体积和最高速度物品42且被选择用于安放在库存支架50处,那么管理模块15可选择特定高销售的打印机以安放在库存支架50处,因为许多订单会请求纸张、墨盒和打印机的组合。在一些实施方案中,可基于确定打印机将完成库存支架50处的更多总订单优先另一更高欢迎度物品而选择打印机。Management module 15 may assign inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to defined areas 80 at inventory holders 50 . Management module 15 may designate specific inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to be placed at defined areas 80 of inventory holders 50 . The designation may be based on and/or responsive to the product velocity and/or volume of inventory items 42 stored in inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34, respectively. In some embodiments, management module 15 may review individual orders within inventory system 10 to determine the best combination of inventory items 42 to store at inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, the optimal combination may be based on determining the highest total amount of an order that can be fulfilled at the inventory holder 50 with a particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . For example, if paper and ink cartridges are the highest volume and highest velocity items 42, respectively, and are selected for placement at the inventory rack 50, the management module 15 may select a particular high-selling printer for placement at the inventory rack 50 because many orders will Request a paper, ink cartridge, and printer combination. In some embodiments, a printer may be selected based on a determination that the printer will fulfill more of the total order at inventory holder 50 over another, more popular item.

管理模块15可根据任何适当算法、逻辑和/或决策过程指派库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34到库存支架50处的限定区域80。例如,管理模块15可计算库存系统10中的各个库存物品42的产品速度。管理模块15可响应于库存物品42的产品速度统计指派库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34到库存支架50处的限定区域80。一些库存系统面临产品速度的大波动。例如,推出新产品可激发这些物品的订单的激增。作为另一实例,可取决于当年的时间以不同速率销售假日和/或当季的库存物品42。产品速度可指给定时间时段内需要系统10内的特定库存物品和/或特定类型库存物品的订单的频率。在一些实施方案中,产品速度可指系统10内的订单需要和/或预测将需要的每个库存物品和/或每种类型的库存物品的相对量。例如,如果系统10内的订单40与其它库存物品相比更频繁地需要库存物品,那么库存物品可具有相对高的产品速度。在一些实施方案中,产品速度可指给定时间时段中给定库存物品的需求量。或者或是另外,产品速度可简单指库存系统10内打开和/或接收的订单40请求的库存物品42的量。在一些实施方案中,速度可指历史速度、已知需求和期望需求的一些适当组合。Management module 15 may assign inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to defined areas 80 at inventory holders 50 according to any suitable algorithm, logic, and/or decision process. For example, management module 15 may calculate a product velocity for each inventory item 42 in inventory system 10 . Management module 15 may assign inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 in response to the product velocity statistics for inventory items 42 . Some inventory systems face large fluctuations in product velocity. For example, launching a new product can spark a surge in orders for those items. As another example, holiday and/or seasonal inventory items 42 may be sold at different rates depending on the time of year. Product velocity may refer to the frequency of orders requiring a particular inventory item and/or a particular type of inventory item within system 10 within a given time period. In some embodiments, product velocity may refer to the relative quantity of each inventory item and/or each type of inventory item that an order within system 10 requires and/or is forecast to require. For example, an inventory item may have a relatively high production velocity if orders 40 within the system 10 require the inventory item more frequently than other inventory items. In some embodiments, product velocity may refer to demand for a given inventory item in a given time period. Alternatively or in addition, product velocity may simply refer to the quantity of inventory items 42 requested by orders 40 opened and/or received within inventory system 10 . In some embodiments, velocity may refer to some suitable combination of historical velocity, known demand, and expected demand.

产品体积可指特定订单请求的库存物品42的相对量。例如,可以块体量下单特定产品,诸如按箱和/或按货板。对于这些库存物品42,将箱和/或货板拆解以将其放置到库存存储48中可能是低效的。产品体积可额外或是替代地指库存系统10内下单的特定库存物品42的立方体积。大型和/或块体库存物品42可能比较少大小和/或块体物品消耗相对更多的劳力以整合到库存保持器30中。因此,管理模块15可计算各个库存保持器42的产品体积且确定将保持这些物品的货板保持器34安放在库存支架50处。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定各个库存物品42的产品速度和产品体积且基于产品速度和产品体积统计确定是否将库存物品42安放在库存支架50处。Product volume may refer to the relative amount of inventory item 42 requested for a particular order. For example, a particular product may be ordered in bulk, such as by case and/or by pallet. For these inventory items 42 , it may be inefficient to dismantle the cases and/or pallets to place them in inventory storage 48 . Product volume may additionally or alternatively refer to the cubic volume of a particular inventory item 42 ordered within inventory system 10 . Large and/or bulky inventory items 42 may be relatively more labor intensive to integrate into inventory holders 30 than smaller sized and/or bulky items. Accordingly, the management module 15 may calculate the product volume for each inventory holder 42 and determine where the pallet holder 34 holding these items will be placed at the inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, management module 15 may determine the product velocity and product volume for each inventory item 42 and determine whether to place inventory item 42 at inventory holder 50 based on the product velocity and product volume statistics.

管理模块15可因此计算库存物品42的产品速度和/或产品体积统计。产品速度可基于库存系统10内过去的订单信息、历史订单趋势、当前订单来确定,呈现订单信息、已知和/或期望需求,且/或预测的未来订单信息、销售信息和/或用于确定库存系统10内的库存物品42的已知或期望需求的任何其它适当信息。基于产品速度和/或产品体积,管理模块15可确定具有相对高欢迎度和/或高体积的库存物品42。具有高欢迎度的库存物品42可指多个订单以相对高频率请求的物品。这些库存物品42通常可导致管理模块50生成对应高量的任务指派以履行这些库存物品42的订单。管理模块15可基于确定指派将减少使用库存支架50履行这些物品的订单所生成的任务指派的量而指派货板保持器34和/或库存保持器30。Management module 15 may thus calculate product velocity and/or product volume statistics for inventory items 42 . Product velocity may be determined based on past order information, historical order trends, current orders within inventory system 10, presenting order information, known and/or expected demand, and/or forecasted future order information, sales information and/or for Any other suitable information to determine known or expected demand for inventory items 42 within inventory system 10 . Based on product velocity and/or product volume, management module 15 may determine inventory items 42 that have relatively high popularity and/or high volume. Inventory items 42 with high popularity may refer to items that are requested by multiple orders with a relatively high frequency. These inventory items 42 can often cause management module 50 to generate a correspondingly high volume of task assignments to fulfill orders for these inventory items 42 . Management module 15 may assign pallet holder 34 and/or inventory holder 30 based on determining that the assignment will reduce the amount of task assignments generated by fulfilling orders for those items using inventory holder 50 .

管理模块15在选择库存物品42以安放在库存支架50处时可考虑与库存物品42的需求相关联的各个这些度量。例如,管理模块15可确定具有最高产品速度和/或产品体积的库存物品42的量来指派给库存支架50。作为另一实例,管理模块15可确定具有最高已知或期望需求的产品的量。所选库存支架42的量可对应于用于库存支架50处的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的限定区域80的量。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可比较速度与预订阈值来确定是否要将库存物品42安放在库存支架50处。例如,可能需要库存物品42来生成至少预定量的系统活动和/或任务指派以有资格放置在库存支架50处。此外或是替代地,管理模块15可基于比较、分类或另外分析各个产品的速度来确定具有最高速度的库存物品而确定具有最高速度的库存物品42。Management module 15 may consider each of these metrics associated with demand for inventory items 42 when selecting inventory items 42 for placement at inventory holders 50 . For example, management module 15 may determine the quantity of inventory item 42 with the highest product velocity and/or product volume to assign to inventory holder 50 . As another example, management module 15 may determine the quantity of a product with the highest known or expected demand. The selected amount of inventory holder 42 may correspond to the amount used for defined area 80 of inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 at inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, management module 15 may compare the speed to a booking threshold to determine whether to place inventory item 42 at inventory holder 50 . For example, an inventory item 42 may be required to generate at least a predetermined amount of system activity and/or task assignments to qualify for placement at the inventory holder 50 . Additionally or alternatively, the management module 15 may determine the inventory item 42 having the highest velocity based on comparing, sorting, or otherwise analyzing the velocity of the individual products to determine the inventory item having the highest velocity.

为了提供更具体的实例,库存支架50的特定实施方案可包括三十个限定区域80。管理模块15可确定适当量的库存物品42以填充具有库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的库存支架50处的三十个位置。例如,货板保持器34可保持特定库存物品42的一个特定SKU的块体量。同时,库存保持器30的特定实施方案可承载各个库存物品42的若干SKU。高速度物品42可一起存储在库存保持器30中使得多个库存物品42可存储在库存保持器30中的库存支架50处的一个限定区域80处。返回到先前讨论的办公供应实例,库存保持器30可保持受欢迎的墨盒的各个SKU,同时货板保持器34可保持具有单个SKU的高体积纸盒。结果,虽然库存支架50处可存在例如三十个限定区域80,但是管理模块15可确定更高量的库存物品42以存储在限定区域80处。例如,管理模块15可指定50-60或更多个SKU的库存物品42以以安放在库存支架50处。To provide a more specific example, a particular embodiment of inventory holder 50 may include thirty defined areas 80 . Management module 15 may determine an appropriate amount of inventory items 42 to fill the thirty locations at inventory holders 50 with inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 . For example, the pallet holder 34 may hold a specific SKU's block quantity of a specific inventory item 42 . Also, certain embodiments of inventory holder 30 may carry several SKUs for each inventory item 42 . High velocity items 42 may be stored together in inventory holder 30 such that multiple inventory items 42 may be stored at one defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 in inventory holder 30 . Returning to the office supply example discussed earlier, the stock holder 30 may hold individual SKUs of popular ink cartridges, while the pallet holder 34 may hold high volume cartons with a single SKU. As a result, while there may be, for example, thirty defined areas 80 at the inventory holder 50 , the management module 15 may determine a higher quantity of inventory items 42 to store at the defined areas 80 . For example, management module 15 may designate 50-60 or more SKUs of inventory items 42 to be placed at inventory holder 50 .

然而,应注意,本文只出于说明的目的提供具体数量,且任何适当量的库存物品42可取决于库存支架50处的限定区域80、库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的配置和布置而安放在库存支架50处。例如,管理模块15可确定存储比存在的限定区域80更少的库存物品42,且/或可因此指派保持相同SKU或库存物品42的多个SKU的多个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。作为另一实例,库存支架50处的限定区域80的量可取决于库存系统10的系统活动而改变。因此,虽然已经讨论限定区域80的实例量,但是可使用任何适当量的限定区域80。此外或是替代地,在一些实施方案中,库存支架50可取决于特定时间处高于库存系统10内的最小阈值的高度受欢迎和/或高体积库存物品42的量而具有可配置量的限定区域80。还应注意,管理模块15可操作以在库存物品被接收到库存系统10中的时间将高速度物品分组到接收站52处的库存保持器30中。管理模块15可提供指令给接收站52以将特定库存物品42放置到库存保持器30中。因此,库存保持器30可预先配置成包括高速度库存物品42使得其可在适当时间被放置在库存支架50处。It should be noted, however, that specific quantities are provided herein for purposes of illustration only, and that any suitable quantity of inventory items 42 may depend on the configuration of defined areas 80 at inventory holders 50, inventory holders 30, and/or pallet holders 34 and arrangement and placed at the inventory holder 50. For example, management module 15 may determine to store fewer inventory items 42 than exist in defined area 80, and/or may accordingly assign multiple inventory holders 30 and/or pallets that hold the same SKU or multiple SKUs of inventory items 42 Holder 34. As another example, the amount of defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 may vary depending on the system activity of inventory system 10 . Thus, while an example amount of defined area 80 has been discussed, any suitable amount of defined area 80 may be used. Additionally or alternatively, in some embodiments, inventory holder 50 may have a configurable amount of inventory holder 50 depending on the amount of highly popular and/or high volume inventory items 42 above a minimum threshold within inventory system 10 at a particular time. Defined area 80 . It should also be noted that management module 15 is operable to group high velocity items into inventory holders 30 at receiving station 52 as inventory items are received into inventory system 10 . Management module 15 may provide instructions to receiving station 52 to place specific inventory items 42 into inventory holders 30 . Accordingly, inventory holders 30 may be preconfigured to include high velocity inventory items 42 such that they may be placed at inventory holders 50 at the appropriate time.

基于所选的库存物品42,管理模块15可选择保持所选库存物品42的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。管理模块15然后可为移动驱动单元20生成且/或发布任务指派以将该保持器运送到库存支架50处的限定区域80。在其中库存系统10存储5,000个SKU的唯一库存物品42且以三十个限定区域80布置库存支架50的实例实施方案中,管理模块15可选择多达三十个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的组合安放在库存支架50处。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可选择存储库存物品42的最佳组合的库存保持器30以安放在库存支架50处。此外或是替代地,库存保持器30的选择可基于确定在库存支架50处完成高订单线量。订单“线”可指该订单中的个别线物品。线可指订单上的特定SKU。例如,三个不同SKU的订单可具有三个线。当选择库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34来指派给库存支架50时,管理模块15可确定期望由特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34完成的订单上的线总量。基于所完成的线总量,管理模块15可指派得分给特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。管理模块15可因此指派得分给库存系统10内的各个库存保持器且/或可确定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的每个的最高相对得分。基于具有最佳得分的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34,管理模块15可选择该库存保持器30或货板保持器34。当补充接收站52处的库存保持器30时,管理模块15可在确定如何且哪个组合的库存物品42被放置到库存保持器30中而可额外或是替代地考虑类似因素。应注意,虽然在实例实施方案中由管理模块15考虑完成的总线,但是管理模块15可基于完成的订单的总量而额外或是替代地选择特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。Based on the selected inventory item 42 , the management module 15 may select the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 that holds the selected inventory item 42 . Management module 15 may then generate and/or issue a task assignment for mobile drive unit 20 to transport the holder to defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 . In an example embodiment in which inventory system 10 stores 5,000 SKUs of unique inventory items 42 and inventory holders 50 are arranged in thirty defined areas 80, management module 15 may select up to thirty inventory holders 30 and/or stock holders. The combination of plate holders 34 is seated at inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, management module 15 may select the inventory holder 30 that stores the best combination of inventory items 42 to place at inventory holder 50 . Additionally or alternatively, the selection of inventory holder 30 may be based on a determination that a high order line volume is being fulfilled at inventory holder 50 . An order "line" may refer to an individual line item in that order. A line can refer to a specific SKU on an order. For example, an order for three different SKUs may have three lines. When selecting an inventory holder 30 and/or a pallet holder 34 to assign to an inventory holder 50, the management module 15 may determine the total amount of lines on the order that are expected to be fulfilled by the particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . Management module 15 may assign a score to a particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 based on the total amount of lines completed. Management module 15 may thus assign scores to individual inventory holders within inventory system 10 and/or may determine the highest relative score for each of inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . Based on the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 with the best score, the management module 15 may select the inventory holder 30 or the pallet holder 34 . When replenishing inventory holders 30 at receiving stations 52 , management module 15 may additionally or alternatively consider similar factors in determining how and which combined inventory items 42 are placed into inventory holders 30 . It should be noted that although in the example embodiment the completed bus is considered by the management module 15, the management module 15 may additionally or alternatively select a particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 based on the total amount of completed orders. .

管理模块15可因此在选择库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34用于库存支架50时考虑完成的产品速度和/或总订单。例如,基于检验库存物品42的已知需求和历史下单趋势,管理模块15可选择计算来履行和/或完成库存支架50处最多的订单的库存物品42的组合。在实例中,库存系统10中的五个最高销售物品可分别为纸张、墨盒、铅笔、纸张和打印机。基于确定以上产品的最常用的订单组合为墨盒、纸张和打印机,管理模块15可因此选择纸张、墨盒和打印机来存储在库存支架50处。The management module 15 may therefore consider the rate of product fulfillment and/or total orders when selecting inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 for inventory holders 50 . For example, based on examining known demand and historical ordering trends for inventory items 42 , management module 15 may select the combination of inventory items 42 calculated to fulfill and/or complete the most orders at inventory holder 50 . In an example, the five top selling items in inventory system 10 may be paper, ink cartridges, pencils, paper, and printers, respectively. Based on determining that the most commonly ordered combination of the above products is ink cartridges, paper, and printers, management module 15 may select paper, ink cartridges, and printers to store at inventory holder 50 accordingly.

在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可调度库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34以放置在库存支架50处。管理模块15可计划调度来基于与库存物品42相关联的度量将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34运送到库存支架50。例如,管理模块15可确定库存物品42期望的需求。基于期望需求,在未来当期望其它库存保持器的库存物品42的期望需求高于当前库存支架50处的库存保持器30中的库存物品42时的一些时间,管理模块15可确定特定库存保持器30应取代库存支架50处的另一库存保持器30。因此,管理模块15可组建在其上各个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34将在库存支架50可用的调度。管理模块15还可确定在未来履行特定订单且或延迟填充订单使得各个订单上的库存物品42可被分组在一起。因此,在未来的时间将请求更大量的这些物品42且在该时间保持这些物品的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34可被移动到库存支架50。管理模块15还可基于确定何时调度各个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34运送到库存支架50而确定如何且/或何时在库存支架50处填充订单。In some embodiments, management module 15 may dispatch inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 for placement at inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may plan a schedule to ship inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to inventory holders 50 based on metrics associated with inventory items 42 . For example, management module 15 may determine expected demand for inventory items 42 . Based on the expected demand, the management module 15 may determine a particular inventory holder at some time in the future when the expected demand for inventory items 42 from other inventory holders is higher than the inventory item 42 in the inventory holder 30 currently at the inventory holder 50 30 should replace another inventory holder 30 at inventory holder 50 . Accordingly, management module 15 may compose a schedule on which individual inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 will be available at inventory holders 50 . Management module 15 may also determine to fulfill particular orders in the future and or delay filling orders so that inventory items 42 on various orders may be grouped together. Accordingly, at a future time greater quantities of these items 42 will be requested and the inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 holding these items at that time may be moved to the inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may also determine how and/or when to fill orders at inventory holder 50 based on determining when to schedule shipment of individual inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to inventory holder 50 .

在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可在库存支架50处选择特定限定区域80以放置特定库存保持器30或货板保持器34。例如,管理模块15可基于库存支架50处的期望工作分配选择特定限定区域80。例如,库存支架50可包括各从库存支架50中的各自工作区内移除物品42的各个操作器。基于库存支架50工作区的期望或实际的工作量,管理模块15可分配库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34给这些特定区。可使用工作量的任何适当度量,诸如每小时挑选量或每分钟挑选量或可操作以测量库存支架50处的活动级的其它适当度量。管理模块15可跨库存支架50的各个工作区平衡工作分配。在其它实施方案中,管理模块15可跨工作区以各个高速度物品42随机指派库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可指派货板保持器34给特定子组的限定区域80,同时指派库存保持器30给另一子组的限定区域80。例如,货板保持器34可一起被分组和/或放置到库存支架50处。货板保持器34可例如被分组到特定工作区中。作为另一实例,库存保持器30可一起被分组和/或放置到库存支架50处,其可以是在与货板保持器34不同的工作区中。In some embodiments, management module 15 may select a particular defined area 80 at inventory rack 50 to place a particular inventory holder 30 or pallet holder 34 . For example, management module 15 may select a particular defined area 80 based on the desired work distribution at inventory holder 50 . For example, inventory holder 50 may include individual operators that each remove items 42 from respective work areas in inventory holder 50 . Based on the expected or actual workload of work areas of inventory holders 50, management module 15 may assign inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to those particular areas. Any suitable measure of workload may be used, such as picks per hour or picks per minute or other suitable measure operable to measure the level of activity at inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may balance work distribution across the various work areas of inventory holder 50 . In other embodiments, management module 15 may randomly assign inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 with each high velocity item 42 across the work area. In some embodiments, management module 15 may assign pallet holders 34 to a particular subset of defined areas 80 while assigning inventory holders 30 to another subset of defined areas 80 . For example, the pallet holders 34 may be grouped together and/or placed at the inventory holder 50 . The pallet holders 34 may, for example, be grouped into specific work zones. As another example, inventory holders 30 may be grouped together and/or placed at inventory holder 50 , which may be in a different work area than pallet holders 34 .

管理模块15可基于各自库存保持器30或货板保持器34内的库存物品的相对速度而确定订单保持器30和/或货板保持器34被最佳分配给库存支架50的各个限定区域80。还应注意,库存支架50可取决于在时间的特定持续时间下期望在库存支架50处完成的总工作量而具有可配置的工作区量。例如,尤其在库存系统10的重度工作、下单和/或系统活动级期间,更多操作器可被指派给库存支架50。因此,库存管理模块15可平衡工作分配且/或设置在其下基于库存支架50处的操作器的量而在库存支架50处填充订单的速率。管理模块15可因此基于操作器的数量指派更多工作和/或更高速度物品。如下文更详细讨论,操作器的数量还可影响被运送给库存支架50用于订单履行的订单保持器40的数量和/或类型。考虑库存支架50的活动级可确保库存支架50处的操作器不会工作过度且/或完成给定比实际可能更多的任务。管理模块15还可指派适当量的工作给库存支架50。另外,基于产品速度分布库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34给各个限定区80可在订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动时容许其更有序且/或平衡的流动。Management module 15 may determine that order holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 are optimally assigned to each defined area 80 of inventory holder 50 based on the relative velocity of inventory items within the respective inventory holder 30 or pallet holder 34 . It should also be noted that inventory holder 50 may have a configurable amount of work area depending on the total amount of work expected to be done at inventory holder 50 for a particular duration of time. For example, more operators may be assigned to inventory holders 50 , especially during heavy work, order placement, and/or system activity levels of inventory system 10 . Accordingly, inventory management module 15 may balance work distribution and/or set a rate at which orders are filled at inventory holder 50 based on the amount of operators at inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may therefore assign more work and/or higher velocity items based on the number of operators. As discussed in more detail below, the number of operators may also affect the number and/or type of order holders 40 shipped to inventory holder 50 for order fulfillment. Taking into account the level of activity of inventory holder 50 may ensure that operators at inventory holder 50 are not overworked and/or given more tasks than is actually possible. Management module 15 may also assign an appropriate amount of work to inventory holder 50 . Additionally, distributing inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to various defined zones 80 based on product velocity may allow for a more orderly and/or balanced flow of order holders 40 as they move along inventory holders 50 .

在库存系统10内,库存物品42的需求不时可改变。例如,随着推出新产品和产品版本,库存物品可逐渐变得不受欢迎且/或被其它库存物品42取代。例如,DVD上推出的新电影最初可能是高度受欢迎的,但是可能随时间和/或随着推出新DVD而降低。因此,管理模块15可能够随时追踪产品速度和/或库存物品42的产品。例如,管理模块15可追踪库存物品42的已知需求和/或期望需求。随着库存物品42的需求的变化,管理模块15可发布适当任务指派以基于所述变化用其它库存物品42取代存储在库存支架50处的库存物品42。例如,管理模块15可确定存储在库存支架50处的库存物品42在欢迎度上降低到库存存储48中当前存储的另一库存物品42之下。管理模块15可发布适当任务以从库存支架50移除该库存物品42且用当前在库存存储48中的库存物品取代之。另外,随着库存支架50使用来自各个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的库存物品42,存储在这些各自保持器中的库存物品可降低。因此,管理模块15可检测、确定和/或接收给定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的库存物品42的量的一些指示。预定量可例如指示库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34在库存物品42的量上即将耗尽且已耗尽库存物品42。管理模块15可因此发布任务指派以运送补充库存物品42给库存支架50。管理模块15可用存储相同类型的库存物品42的保持器取代耗尽的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34,且/或可用具有比耗尽库存物品42相对更高速度的不同库存物品42取代耗尽的保持器。Within inventory system 10, the demand for inventory items 42 may change from time to time. For example, inventory items may gradually become unpopular and/or replaced by other inventory items 42 as new products and product versions are introduced. For example, a new movie released on DVD may initially be highly popular, but may decline over time and/or as new DVDs are released. Accordingly, management module 15 may be able to track product velocity and/or product inventory items 42 over time. For example, management module 15 may track known demand and/or expected demand for inventory items 42 . As the demand for inventory items 42 changes, management module 15 may issue appropriate task assignments to replace inventory items 42 stored at inventory holders 50 with other inventory items 42 based on the changes. For example, management module 15 may determine that an inventory item 42 stored at inventory holder 50 has dropped in popularity below another inventory item 42 currently stored in inventory store 48 . Management module 15 may issue an appropriate task to remove the inventory item 42 from inventory holder 50 and replace it with the inventory item currently in inventory store 48 . Additionally, as inventory holder 50 uses inventory items 42 from individual inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34, the inventory items stored in these respective holders may decrease. Accordingly, management module 15 may detect, determine, and/or receive some indication of the quantity of inventory items 42 in a given inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . The predetermined amount may, for example, indicate that the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 is about to run out in the amount of the inventory item 42 and has depleted the inventory item 42 . Management module 15 may therefore issue a task assignment to ship replenishment inventory item 42 to inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may replace depleted inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 with holders storing the same type of inventory item 42 and/or may use a different inventory item having a relatively higher velocity than depleted inventory item 42 42 to replace depleted retainers.

在一些实施方案中,库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34可在面对库存支架50的侧上以更快速率耗尽。例如,货板保持器34可首先耗尽到达库存支架50的操作器内的库存物品42。因此,可耗尽货板保持器34的最接近库存支架50的侧,而背对库存支架50的侧仍可包括可接受的量的库存物品42。因此,管理模块15可接收在库存支架50处应旋转的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的状态指示。因此,管理模块15可给移动驱动单元20发布适当任务指派以旋转适当库存保持器30或货板保持器34。下文将参考图5讨论用于完成此的特定操作和技术的更多细节。In some embodiments, inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be depleted at a faster rate on the side facing inventory holder 50 . For example, the pallet holder 34 may be the first to deplete the inventory items 42 arriving within the handler of the inventory holder 50 . Thus, the side of the pallet holder 34 closest to the inventory holder 50 may be depleted, while the side facing away from the inventory holder 50 may still include an acceptable amount of inventory items 42 . Accordingly, management module 15 may receive an indication of the status of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 that should be rotated at inventory holder 50 . Accordingly, management module 15 may issue an appropriate task assignment to mobile drive unit 20 to rotate the appropriate inventory holder 30 or pallet holder 34 . More details of specific operations and techniques for accomplishing this are discussed below with reference to FIG. 5 .

在选择库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34安放在库存支架50处的固定站之后,在特定实施方案中,管理模块15可给特定移动驱动单元20指派任务以将所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34沿库存支架50运送给限定区域80。例如,管理模块15可将识别所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的位置的任务指派传达给所选移动驱动单元20。管理模块15可基于所选移动驱动单元20相对于特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的位置或状态、所选移动驱动单元20已完成先前指派的任务的指示、预定调度和/或任何其它适当考虑而选择移动驱动单元20来指派相关任务。管理模块15可计划移动驱动单元20从移动驱动单元的当前位置到所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34将采用的路径。响应于指派任务,移动驱动单元20可请求到特定库存保持器30或货板保持器34的目的地的路径。管理模块15可选择请求的移动驱动单元20的当前位置与所请求目的地之间的路径且将识别该路径的信息传达给移动驱动单元20。管理模块15可利用当前拥塞、历史流量趋势、任务优先次序和/或其它适当考虑的认知来选择所请求移动驱动单元20采用来到达目的地的最佳路径。此外,在计划路径(或指派任务时)时,管理模块15可作出有关库存系统10的升降机、传输机、扶梯、隧道和/或其它传输设备或特征的知情决策以促进相关移动驱动单元20在库存系统10内的移动。After selecting a fixed station at which inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 are placed at inventory holders 50, in certain embodiments, management module 15 may task specific mobile drive units 20 to place the selected inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 are transported along inventory holder 50 to defined area 80 . For example, management module 15 may communicate a task assignment to selected mobile drive unit 20 to identify the location of selected inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . The management module 15 may be based on the location or state of the selected mobile drive unit 20 relative to the particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34, an indication that the selected mobile drive unit 20 has completed a previously assigned task, a scheduled schedule, and/or or any other appropriate consideration to select the mobile drive unit 20 to assign the relevant task to. Management module 15 may plan the path that mobile drive unit 20 will take from the mobile drive unit's current location to the selected inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . In response to assigning a task, mobile drive unit 20 may request a route to the destination of a particular inventory holder 30 or pallet holder 34 . Management module 15 may select a path between the current location of the requesting mobile drive unit 20 and the requested destination and communicate information identifying the path to mobile drive unit 20 . Management module 15 may use knowledge of current congestion, historical traffic trends, task prioritization, and/or other appropriate considerations to select the best path to take by requested mobile drive unit 20 to reach the destination. Additionally, when planning routes (or when assigning tasks), management module 15 can make informed decisions about elevators, conveyors, escalators, tunnels, and/or other conveying equipment or features of inventory system 10 to facilitate associated mobile drive units 20 in Movements within the inventory system 10.

在从管理模块15接收路径之后,所请求的移动驱动单元20然后可以逐区段的方式穿过该路径移动到所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的目的地。在开始特定区段之前,相关移动驱动单元20可请求准许使用来自管理模块15的区段。结果,管理模块15可保存所述区段用于该移动驱动单元20。结果,管理模块15还可负责解决对库存系统10的特定部分的使用的竞争请求。在到达库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34之后,移动驱动单元20可耦合、对接或以其它方式连接到保持器。例如,移动驱动单元20可在相关保持器下方移动且使用移动驱动单元的对接头抬升所述保持器。当在保持器下方移动时,移动驱动单元20可使其本身与保持器的一部分对准使得对接头和/或移动驱动单元的中心垂直轴大体上与保持器的中心垂直轴对准。在耦合、对接和/或连接到保持器之后,移动驱动单元20可将特定保持器运送到所选限定区域80。在所选限定区域处,移动驱动单元20可解锁、下降、解耦,或以其它方式从库存保持器30断开。移动驱动单元20然后可移离库存保持器30且/或对管理模块15指示其可用性以接收另一任务指派。After receiving the route from the management module 15 , the requested mobile drive unit 20 may then move across the route in a segment-by-section manner to the destination of the selected inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 . Prior to starting a particular segment, the associated mobile drive unit 20 may request permission to use the segment from the management module 15 . As a result, management module 15 may save the session for that mobile drive unit 20 . As a result, management module 15 may also be responsible for resolving competing requests for usage of a particular portion of inventory system 10 . After reaching inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34, mobile drive unit 20 may be coupled, docked, or otherwise connected to the holder. For example, the mobile drive unit 20 may move under the associated holder and lift the holder using the docking head of the mobile drive unit. When moving under the holder, mobile drive unit 20 may align itself with a portion of the holder such that the central vertical axis of the docking head and/or mobile drive unit is generally aligned with the central vertical axis of the holder. After being coupled, docked, and/or connected to the holder, mobile drive unit 20 may transport the particular holder to the selected defined area 80 . At the selected defined area, mobile drive unit 20 may be unlocked, lowered, decoupled, or otherwise disconnected from inventory holder 30 . Mobile drive unit 20 may then move away from inventory holder 30 and/or indicate its availability to management module 15 to receive another task assignment.

根据以上原理,所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的每个可由移动驱动单元20运送到库存支架50。然而,应注意,虽然讨论了如何将库存保持器30和货板保持器34运送到库存支架50的具体实例,但是可使用任何适当方法。例如,在一些实施方案中,库存保持器30可由移动驱动单元20运送到库存支架50,而货板保持器34可由一些其它运送构件运送,诸如由起重机、叉车、传输机,或能够运送库存物品42的货板的其它工业移动设备。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可能够结合将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34运送到库存支架50而利用一个或多个漂移位置。下文参考图5讨论漂移位置的更详细讨论以及其如何可用于履行库存支架50处的订单。In accordance with the above principles, each of the selected inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be transported by the mobile drive unit 20 to the inventory holder 50 . It should be noted, however, that while specific examples of how to transport inventory holders 30 and pallet holders 34 to inventory holders 50 are discussed, any suitable method may be used. For example, in some embodiments, inventory holders 30 may be transported by mobile drive unit 20 to inventory holders 50, while pallet holders 34 may be transported by some other transport means, such as by a crane, forklift, conveyor, or capable of transporting inventory items. 42 pallets for other industrial mobile equipment. In some embodiments, management module 15 may be able to utilize one or more drift locations in conjunction with transporting inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to inventory holders 50 . A more detailed discussion of drift locations and how they may be used to fulfill orders at inventory holder 50 is discussed below with reference to FIG. 5 .

在库存系统10的操作期间,管理模块15可在各个时间接收请求各个库存物品42的订单。为了履行由管理模块15接收的库存物品42的订单,管理模块15可将两个或多个订单布置到订单保持器40上。订单保持器40可例如被布置在引导站54处。在引导站54处,一个或多个订单可分组到容器60中且布置在订单保持器40上。容器60可基于任何数量和类型的因素而布置到订单保持器40上,包括容器60的大小、期望被接收在容器60中的库存物品42的类型、从库存支架50接收订单的库存物品42的能力,或其它各个适当因素。此外或是替代地,管理模块15可基于库存支架50处的给定库存保持器34内所期望的订单完成而确定分组各个订单。During operation of inventory system 10 , management module 15 may receive orders requesting individual inventory items 42 at various times. To fulfill an order for inventory items 42 received by management module 15 , management module 15 may place two or more orders onto order holder 40 . The order holder 40 can be arranged, for example, at the guidance station 54 . At the induction station 54 , one or more orders may be grouped into containers 60 and arranged on the order holder 40 . The containers 60 may be placed on the order holder 40 based on any number and type of factors, including the size of the containers 60, the type of inventory items 42 desired to be received in the containers 60, the number of inventory items 42 receiving an order from the inventory holder 50, capacity, or other appropriate factors. Additionally or alternatively, management module 15 may determine to group individual orders based on expected fulfillment of the order within a given inventory holder 34 at inventory holder 50 .

管理模块15可确定以任何适当方式将与容器60相关联的订单分组到订单保持器40中。例如,管理模块15可检验库存系统10内的优秀订单以响应于一个或多个库存物品的订单而识别一个或多个库存物品42。管理模块15可确定哪个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34存储这些库存物品42。管理模块15可确定订单上的库存物品42是否存储在库存支架50处和/或库存存储48中。管理模块15可基于确定不同订单请求的一个或多个库存物品42各位于库存支架50处的限定区域80处而分组订单。订单可具有相关联容器60以接收订单的库存物品42。例如,如上文所述,容器60可为适当大小的卡板盒或适于装运的其它容器。因此,订单保持器40可被布置使得其保持与指定用于沿库存支架50接收各个位置处的库存物品42的订单相关联的各个组的容器60。Management module 15 may determine to group orders associated with containers 60 into order holders 40 in any suitable manner. For example, management module 15 may examine outstanding orders within inventory system 10 to identify one or more inventory items 42 in response to an order for one or more inventory items. The management module 15 may determine which inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 stores the inventory items 42 . Management module 15 may determine whether inventory items 42 on the order are stored at inventory holders 50 and/or in inventory storage 48 . Management module 15 may group orders based on determining that one or more inventory items 42 for different order requests are each located at defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 . An order may have an associated container 60 to receive the order's inventory items 42 . For example, container 60 may be a suitably sized pallet box or other container suitable for shipping, as described above. Accordingly, the order holder 40 may be arranged such that it holds respective groups of containers 60 associated with orders designated to receive inventory items 42 at various locations along the inventory holder 50 .

管理模块15可能够取决于库存系统10的优秀订单和/或各个活动级布置订单保持器40的各个配置。例如,管理模块15可布置订单保持器40使其包括全部位于库存支架50处的库存物品42的订单,当这些订单保持器40被运送到库存支架50以在订单保持器40中的订单上接收库存物品42时,在该订单保持器40中的所有订单可在库存支架50处完成。管理模块15还可布置订单保持器40使其包括位于库存支架50处的库存物品42和存储于库存存储48中的库存物品42的订单。这些订单保持器40可部分在库存支架50处完成且可被运送到各个库存站56使得库存存储48中的库存物品42可由移动驱动单元20被运送到那些库存站56。管理模块15还可布置订单保持器40使其包括单独位于库存存储48内的库存物品42的订单。这些订单保持器可在库存站56处完成。订单保持器40的这些配置可分别称为唯库存支架订单保持器40、混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存站订单保持器40。Management module 15 may be capable of arranging various configurations of order holders 40 depending on outstanding orders and/or various activity levels of inventory system 10 . For example, management module 15 may arrange order holders 40 to include orders for inventory items 42 that are all located at inventory holders 50 when those order holders 40 are shipped to inventory holders 50 to be received on orders in order holders 40 All orders placed in the order holder 40 can be fulfilled at the inventory holder 50 while stocking items 42. Management module 15 may also arrange order holder 40 to include inventory items 42 located at inventory holders 50 and orders for inventory items 42 stored in inventory storage 48 . These order holders 40 may be partially completed at inventory racks 50 and may be transported to various inventory stations 56 so that inventory items 42 in inventory storage 48 may be transported to those inventory stations 56 by mobile drive unit 20 . Management module 15 may also arrange order holder 40 to include orders for inventory items 42 located individually in inventory storage 48 . These order holders can be fulfilled at inventory station 56 . These configurations of order holders 40 may be referred to as inventory-only rack order holders 40 , hybrid order holders 40 , and/or inventory-only order holders 40 , respectively.

管理模块15可基于任何适当考虑确定要装配的订单保持器40的数量和/或配置。例如,管理模块15可因此考虑活动级和/或库存支架50的操作器的工作分配和/或库存支架50的总体工作量。如果管理模块15确定库存支架50的工作量高于预定级,那么管理模块15可确定组建混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存站订单保持器40。工作量可指每小时指派的挑选量、指派的工作量或用于测量库存支架50的活动级的其它适当度量。例如,库存支架50的操作器可能够以预定和/或最大功率速率操作库存支架50。管理模块15可指派工作量给库存支架50,其经计算使得库存支架50的操作器以大体上预定和/或最大的工作速率操作。在一些实施方案中,最大工作速率可用于确定可指派给库存支架50的最佳和/或最大工作量。管理模块15可以确定降低和/或提高库存支架50处的工作以实现最佳和/或最大工作量。基于所述确定,管理模块15可选择订单保持器40的数量和配置。如果(例如)库存支架50处的工作量高于最小值但是低于最大值,那么管理模块15可基于预定调度确定布置混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存支架订单保持器40的混合。可基于尝试平衡工作、保持工作量高于最小值且低于最大值、库存支架50处的操作器的数量和/或任何其它适当因素而确定预定调度。如果库存支架50处的工作量低于最小值,那么管理模块15可确定装配单独由唯库存支架订单保持器40组成(如果可能)的订单保持器40,同时为位于单独订单保持器40中的库存存储48中的库存物品42布置订单保持器40。Management module 15 may determine the number and/or configuration of order holders 40 to assemble based on any suitable considerations. For example, management module 15 may thus take into account the activity level and/or the work assignment of the operators of inventory holder 50 and/or the overall workload of inventory holder 50 . If the management module 15 determines that the workload of the inventory holder 50 is above a predetermined level, the management module 15 may determine to form a hybrid order holder 40 and/or a depot-only order holder 40 . Workload may refer to assigned picks per hour, assigned workload, or other suitable metric for measuring the activity level of inventory holder 50 . For example, an operator of inventory holder 50 may be capable of operating inventory holder 50 at a predetermined and/or maximum power rate. Management module 15 may assign workloads to inventory holders 50 that are calculated such that operators of inventory holders 50 operate at substantially predetermined and/or maximum work rates. In some embodiments, the maximum work rate may be used to determine an optimal and/or maximum work amount that may be assigned to inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may determine to reduce and/or increase work at inventory holder 50 to achieve optimal and/or maximum work load. Based on the determination, management module 15 may select the number and configuration of order holders 40 . If, for example, the workload at inventory holder 50 is above the minimum value but below the maximum value, management module 15 may determine to place a mix of hybrid order holders 40 and/or inventory holder-only order holders 40 based on a predetermined schedule. The predetermined schedule may be determined based on trying to balance the work, keeping the workload above a minimum and below a maximum, the number of operators at the inventory holder 50, and/or any other suitable factors. If the workload at the inventory holder 50 is below the minimum, the management module 15 may determine to assemble an order holder 40 consisting solely of inventory holder-only order holders 40 (if possible) Inventory items 42 in inventory storage 48 arrange order holder 40 .

管理模块15可根据以上原理对订单和/或订单保持器40的布置进行排序。例如,管理模块15可使能够在库存支架50处履行的订单优先于由相对更大速率或较不受欢迎且可能位于库存存储48中的物品组成的订单。替代地或是另外,单独引导站54可指定用于处置较不受欢迎的库存物品42的订单。管理模块15可引导订单保持器40以装配在这些其它物品的其它引导站处。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可布置包括由库存支架50存储但是基于各种因素(诸如所讨论的活动级考虑)可仍然决定从库存站56而不是在库存支架50处履行这些订单的库存物品42的订单保持器40。The management module 15 may sequence the orders and/or the arrangement of the order holders 40 according to the above principles. For example, management module 15 may prioritize orders that can be fulfilled at inventory holder 50 over orders that consist of relatively greater velocity or less popular items that may be located in inventory storage 48 . Alternatively or additionally, individual lead stations 54 may be designated for handling orders for less popular inventory items 42 . Management module 15 may direct order holders 40 to fit at other directing stations for these other items. In some embodiments, management module 15 may arrange to include inventory stored by inventory holder 50 but may still decide to fulfill these orders from inventory station 56 rather than at inventory holder 50 based on various factors, such as the activity level considerations discussed. An order holder 40 for items 42 .

管理模块15可额外地或替代地考虑布置订单保持器40时将由各个订单请求的特定库存物品42存储在库存支架50的何处。例如,管理模块15可跨库存支架50的各个工作区平衡工作量分配。管理模块15可尝试在特定订单保持器40沿库存支架50处的各个位置移动时甚至分配由其接收的库存物品42的量且/或平衡移动到库存支架50的订单保持器40的流动。为了说明,与其从一个限定区域80处的一个库存保持器30接收五个库存物品42,管理模块15可将含有五个不同库存物品42的订单沿库存支架50布置在五个不同限定区域80处。在一些实施方案中,特定库存物品42的SKU可存储在两个不同位置。管理模块15可确定履行订单保持器40中使用存储在库存支架50处的两个不同库存保持器30请求相同SKU的订单,以平衡库存支架50的工作流动且/或防止在特定时间和/或库存支架50的位置上库存支架50活动级的陡增。然而,应注意,本实例只是出于说明目的。管理模块15可以任何适当方式分布和/或平衡库存支架50处的工作。The management module 15 may additionally or alternatively consider where the particular inventory item 42 requested by each order is stored on the inventory holder 50 when placing the order holder 40 . For example, management module 15 may balance workload distribution across various work areas of inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may attempt to even distribute the amount of inventory items 42 received by a particular order holder 40 as it moves along various locations at inventory holder 50 and/or balance the flow of order holders 40 moving to inventory holder 50 . To illustrate, rather than receiving five inventory items 42 from one inventory holder 30 at one defined area 80 , the management module 15 may arrange orders containing five different inventory items 42 at five different defined areas 80 along the inventory rack 50 . In some embodiments, the SKU for a particular inventory item 42 may be stored in two different locations. The management module 15 may determine to fulfill an order in an order holder 40 requesting the same SKU using two different inventory holders 30 stored at the inventory holder 50 to balance the work flow of the inventory holder 50 and/or to prevent A sharp increase in the activity level of the inventory holder 50 at the location of the inventory holder 50 . However, it should be noted that this example is for illustration purposes only. Management module 15 may distribute and/or balance work at inventory holders 50 in any suitable manner.

管理模块15可确定容器60的任何适当组合以布置在订单保持器40中以最小化被运送到库存支架50的订单保持器40的量。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定基于减少移动驱动单元20所需的行程总量而分组订单。如上文所讨论,由管理模块15指派给移动驱动单元20的任务指派可涉及穿过特定路径到目的地。当订单保持器40被运送到库存支架50处时,移动驱动单元20可能需要将订单保持器40从引导站54运送到库存支架50。之后,移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40运送到库存站56和/或装运站58。订单可被分组到订单保持器40以最小化移动驱动单元20所需的行程量且/或减少和/或最小化移动驱动单元20所需的行程的总长度。因此,管理模块15可尝试在布置订单保持器40时最小化移动驱动单元20的总体行程。Management module 15 may determine any suitable combination of containers 60 to place in order holder 40 to minimize the amount of order holder 40 shipped to inventory holder 50 . In some implementations, management module 15 may determine to group orders based on reducing the total number of trips required by mobile drive unit 20 . As discussed above, task assignments to mobile drive units 20 by management module 15 may involve traversing a particular path to a destination. When order holders 40 are shipped to inventory holders 50 , mobile drive unit 20 may need to transfer order holders 40 from lead station 54 to inventory holders 50 . Mobile drive unit 20 may then transport order holder 40 to inventory station 56 and/or shipping station 58 . Orders may be grouped into order holders 40 to minimize the amount of travel required by mobile drive units 20 and/or reduce and/or minimize the overall length of travel required by mobile drive units 20 . Accordingly, management module 15 may attempt to minimize the overall travel of mobile drive unit 20 when placing order holder 40 .

在装配订单保持器40之后,移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40运送到库存系统10内的库存站支架50和/或其它目的地。移动驱动单元20可响应于来自管理模块15的适当任务指派运送订单保持器40。管理模块15可使用上述任务指派和/或路径计划技术中的任一个指派任务给移动驱动单元20以将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50。移动驱动单元20沿库存支架50移动订单保持器40。随着订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动,订单保持器40沿相对于其中库存物品42存储在库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的限定区域80的侧在沿库存支架50的位置接收库存物品42。在一些实施方案中,库存支架50处的操作器可将库存物品42从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34传送到订单保持器40的适当容器60中。管理模块15可在库存支架50处启动指示器,诸如灯或其它视觉指示器以指示操作器期望订单保持器40在哪里减慢且/或停在要接收库存物品42的各个位置。替代地或是另外,管理模块15可将适当信息传送到库存支架50以指示操作器挑选哪个库存物品42且放到哪个容器60中以放置订单保持器40的所述库存物品42。After order holders 40 are assembled, mobile drive unit 20 may transport order holders 40 to dock racks 50 within inventory system 10 and/or to other destinations. Mobile drive unit 20 may ship order holder 40 in response to appropriate task assignments from management module 15 . Management module 15 may assign tasks to mobile drive units 20 to deliver order holders 40 to inventory holders 50 using any of the tasking and/or routing techniques described above. Mobile drive unit 20 moves order holder 40 along inventory holder 50 . As the order holder 40 moves along the inventory holder 50, the order holder 40 moves along the side of the inventory holder 50 relative to the defined area 80 where the inventory item 42 is stored in the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34. The location receives inventory items 42 . In some embodiments, operators at inventory holders 50 may transfer inventory items 42 from inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 into appropriate receptacles 60 of order holders 40 . Management module 15 may activate indicators, such as lights or other visual indicators, at inventory holders 50 to indicate where the operator expects order holders 40 to slow down and/or stop at various locations where inventory items 42 are to be received. Alternatively or additionally, the management module 15 may communicate appropriate information to the inventory holder 50 instructing the operator which inventory item 42 to pick and place into which container 60 to place said inventory item 42 of the order holder 40 .

可根据促进操作器与订单保持器40互动的方式沿库存支架50中相对限定区域80的侧运送订单保持器40。在一些实施方案中,可沿库存支架50的侧运送订单保持器40使得操作器和给定订单保持器40一起在初始方向移动,直至操作器到达操作器的特定工作区的终点。当给定订单保持器40到达下个工作区时,下个工作区的操作器可开始将物品适当放置到订单保持器40中。第一区的操作器然后可返回到该区的远端且然后随着其沿库存支架50在初始方向上移动时继续将库存物品42放置到新订单保持器40。订单保持器40到达特定工作区的起点可根据操作器何时返回到该工作区的起点来定时。下文将参考图5讨论订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动以及库存支架50处的指示器可如何指示操作器运送库存物品42的详细讨论。Order holder 40 may be transported along a side of inventory holder 50 opposite defined area 80 in a manner that facilitates operator interaction with order holder 40 . In some embodiments, the order holders 40 may be transported along the side of the inventory holder 50 such that the operator and a given order holder 40 move together in an initial direction until the operator reaches the end of the operator's particular work area. When a given order holder 40 arrives at the next work area, the operator at the next work area can begin placing items into the order holder 40 as appropriate. The operator of the first zone may then return to the far end of the zone and then continue to place inventory items 42 into the new order holder 40 as it moves along the inventory holder 50 in the original direction. The arrival of the order holder 40 to the start of a particular work area may be timed based on when the operator returns to the start of that work area. A detailed discussion of how the order holder 40 moves along the inventory holder 50 and how an indicator at the inventory holder 50 may instruct the operator to ship the inventory item 42 will be discussed below with reference to FIG. 5 .

在适当库存物品42被接收到订单保持器40的容器60中之后,移动驱动单元20可继续移动订单保持器40到库存系统10内的适当位置。如果订单未完成,那么可由移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40移动到适当库存站56使得可接收额外物品42。在位于库存站56时,额外库存物品42可由订单保持器40中的订单接收。额外或是替代地,库存站56可准备订单保持器40中的容器60以装运到终端用户和/或装运目的地。例如,操作器可执行订单完成任务,诸如增加保护性包装材料给容器60和/或封闭、敲打、密封和/或执行其它任务以备装运容器60。一旦完成订单,订单保持器40便可被移动驱动单元20运送到装运站58用于装运,然而,应注意,在一些实施方案中,库存站56可用于完成且装运订单。此外或是替代地,装运站58可执行上述订单完成任务。After the appropriate inventory item 42 is received into the container 60 of the order holder 40 , the mobile drive unit 20 may proceed to move the order holder 40 to the appropriate location within the inventory system 10 . If the order is not complete, the order holder 40 may be moved by the mobile drive unit 20 to the appropriate stocking station 56 so that additional items 42 may be received. While at inventory station 56 , additional inventory items 42 may be received by an order in order holder 40 . Additionally or alternatively, inventory station 56 may prepare containers 60 in order holders 40 for shipment to end users and/or shipping destinations. For example, the operator may perform order fulfillment tasks such as adding protective packaging material to the container 60 and/or closing, tapping, sealing, and/or performing other tasks to prepare the container 60 for shipping. Once the order is completed, the order holder 40 can be transported by the mobile drive unit 20 to the shipping station 58 for shipping, however, it should be noted that in some embodiments, the inventory station 56 can be used to complete and ship the order. Additionally or alternatively, shipping station 58 may perform the order fulfillment tasks described above.

虽然订单保持器40被安放在库存站56处,但是管理模块15可在库存存储48内定位额外库存物品42。库存系统10内的移动驱动单元的管理指派任务将存储容器60的订单所需的剩余库存物品42的特定库存保持器30运送到库存站56。例如,可在库存站56使用任何适当技术以促进将物品从位于库存存储48中的库存保持器30传送到订单保持器40的容器60。在一个或多个库存站56完成订单之后,订单保持器40和/或容器60可移动且/或被运送到装运站58用于装运到终端用户和/或装运目的地。移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40运送到装运站58以作如上文所讨论的最后装运准备。While order holder 40 is positioned at inventory station 56 , management module 15 may locate additional inventory items 42 within inventory storage 48 . The management of the mobile drive units within the inventory system 10 is tasked with transporting the particular inventory holder 30 to the inventory station 56 for the remaining inventory items 42 needed for the order of storage containers 60 . For example, any suitable technique may be used at inventory station 56 to facilitate transfer of items from inventory holders 30 located in inventory storage 48 to containers 60 of order holders 40 . After the order is fulfilled by one or more inventory stations 56, the order holders 40 and/or containers 60 may be moved and/or shipped to a shipping station 58 for shipment to an end user and/or a shipment destination. Mobile drive unit 20 may transport order holder 40 to shipping station 58 for final shipping preparation as discussed above.

图4图示能够使用库存支架50填充订单的库存系统10的另一实例实施方案的顶视图。在图4中,以多个库存支架50a、50b和50c布置库存系统10。当结合使用时,库存支架50a-50c能够完成存储在库存系统10的库存存储48中的库存物品42的大体上所有订单。如所示,库存系统10可在做出任何适当修改以支持若干库存支架50的情况下以大体上类似于上文参考图3所述的方式操作。FIG. 4 illustrates a top view of another example embodiment of an inventory system 10 capable of filling orders using inventory holders 50 . In FIG. 4, inventory system 10 is arranged in a plurality of inventory holders 50a, 50b, and 50c. When used in conjunction, inventory holders 50a - 50c are capable of fulfilling substantially all orders for inventory items 42 stored in inventory storage 48 of inventory system 10 . As shown, inventory system 10 may operate in a manner generally similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 3 , with any suitable modifications made to support a number of inventory holders 50 .

库存存储48可布置在库存支架50之间使得移动驱动单元可能够根据以上技术基于产品速度和/或体积置换出库存保持器30和/或货板34。另外,可布置接收站52使得库存系统10内的订单保持器40行经的路径被缩短。因此,接收站52可位于存储由这些特定接收站52接收的库存物品32的库存存储48的区域附近。如所示,接收站52位于库存支架50之间使得其可由操作于库存存储48的特定区域附近的移动驱动单元20临达。另外或替代地,可布置接收站52使得操作器可具有往返于库存支架50的路径而不会交叉移动驱动单元20的路径。然而,应注意,虽然图示了特定库存支架50、引导站54、装运站58和接收站52的布置,但是库存系统10的任何特定几何形态和布局可以是适当的且可以使用。此外,可使用任何适当数量和/或类型的库存支架50。Inventory storage 48 may be disposed between inventory holders 50 such that mobile drive units may be able to swap out inventory holders 30 and/or pallets 34 based on product velocity and/or volume according to the techniques above. Additionally, receiving station 52 may be arranged such that the path traveled by order holders 40 within inventory system 10 is shortened. Accordingly, receiving stations 52 may be located near areas of inventory storage 48 that store inventory items 32 received by those particular receiving stations 52 . As shown, receiving station 52 is located between inventory holders 50 such that it is accessible by mobile drive unit 20 operating near a particular area of inventory storage 48 . Additionally or alternatively, receiving station 52 may be arranged such that operators may have a path to and from inventory holder 50 without intersecting the path of mobile drive unit 20 . It should be noted, however, that while a particular arrangement of inventory holders 50, induction stations 54, shipping stations 58, and receiving stations 52 is illustrated, any particular geometry and layout of inventory system 10 may be suitable and may be used. Furthermore, any suitable number and/or type of inventory holders 50 may be used.

在操作中,在移动驱动单元20访问库存支架50a之后,如果订单保持器40具有请求存储在库存支架50b处的库存物品42的订单,那么移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50b。在从库存支架50b接收库存物品42且在访问库存50b之后,移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50c。或者,如果订单保持器40需要库存支架50b处的库存物品42,那么移动驱动单元20可进行到库存支架50c而不访问库存支架50b。在一些实施方案中,如果订单保持器40中的订单接收所有请求的物品且/或在访问这些库存支架50中的一个或多个之后准备完成用于装运,那么移动驱动单元20可在访问库存支架50a和/或50b之后进行到装运站58。因此,在一些实施方案中,订单保持器40可只访问具有订单保持器40中的订单请求的库存物品42的库存支架50a、50b、50c。此外或是替代地,管理模块15可操作以在库存系统10中的每个库存支架50a-50c之间平衡工作分配,使得避免工作量超过最大量和/或低于最小量。例如,库存支架50a和50b可每个存储特定库存物品42。管理模块15可基于确定库存支架50b处的工作量低于库存支架50a处的工作量而确定特定订单保持器40应从库存支架50b而不是库存支架50a接收特定库存物品42,应注意,出于说明目的讨论工作分配平衡的具体实例,管理模块15可确定以任何适当方式平衡库存支架50a-50c处的工作量。管理模块15还可根据先前讨论的平衡技术分配库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34到各个库存支架50的各个限定区域80。In operation, after mobile drive unit 20 accesses inventory rack 50a, mobile drive unit 20 may ship order holder 40 to inventory rack 50b if order holder 40 has an order requesting inventory item 42 to be stored at inventory rack 50b. 50b. After receiving inventory items 42 from inventory holder 50b and after accessing inventory 50b, mobile drive unit 20 may transport order holder 40 to inventory holder 50c. Alternatively, if order holder 40 requires inventory item 42 at inventory rack 50b, mobile drive unit 20 may proceed to inventory rack 50c without accessing inventory rack 50b. In some embodiments, if the order in order holder 40 receives all requested items and/or is ready to complete for shipment after accessing one or more of these inventory holders 50, then mobile drive unit 20 may access the inventory Racks 50a and/or 50b then proceed to shipping station 58 . Accordingly, in some embodiments, the order holder 40 may only access the inventory holders 50a, 50b, 50c that have the inventory items 42 of the order request in the order holder 40 . Additionally or alternatively, the management module 15 is operable to balance the distribution of work among each inventory holder 50a-50c in the inventory system 10 such that the amount of work exceeding a maximum amount and/or falling below a minimum amount is avoided. For example, inventory holders 50a and 50b may each store a particular inventory item 42 . Management module 15 may determine that a particular order holder 40 should receive a particular inventory item 42 from inventory holder 50b rather than inventory holder 50a based on determining that the workload at inventory holder 50b is lower than the workload at inventory holder 50a, noting that, for purposes of illustration, To discuss a specific example of work distribution balancing, management module 15 may determine to balance the workload at inventory holders 50a-50c in any suitable manner. Management module 15 may also assign inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to each defined area 80 of each inventory holder 50 according to the previously discussed balancing techniques.

图5图示用于使用库存系统10中的库存支架50履行订单的特定技术。库存系统10可包括一个或多个漂移位置90A到90D。管理模块15可操作以指定库存系统10内的特定区域作为漂移位置90。因此,管理模块15可结合库存支架50使用一个或多个漂移空间以促进履行订单。图5还图示旋转位于库存支架50处的限定区域80中的库存保持器30的技术。最后,图5图示库存支架50启动指示器64以促进操作器在其各自工作区内移动的能力。指示器64可指示给定订单保持器40将相对库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的位置而停止。将依序讨论这些技术中的每个。FIG. 5 illustrates a particular technique for fulfilling an order using inventory holder 50 in inventory system 10 . Inventory system 10 may include one or more drift locations 90A through 90D. Management module 15 is operable to designate specific areas within inventory system 10 as drift locations 90 . Accordingly, management module 15 may use one or more drift spaces in conjunction with inventory holder 50 to facilitate order fulfillment. FIG. 5 also illustrates the technique of rotating the inventory holder 30 located in a defined area 80 at the inventory holder 50 . Finally, FIG. 5 illustrates the ability of inventory holder 50 to activate indicator 64 to facilitate movement of operators within their respective work zones. The indicator 64 may indicate that a given order holder 40 is to be stopped relative to the position of the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 . Each of these techniques will be discussed in turn.

库存系统10可利用本文称为“漂移”的技术根据订单包装布置促进在库存支架50处履行订单。漂移可容许库存系统10的组件在完成涉及该元件的特定任务期间朝向特定目的地移动或以其它方式定位以便减少到相关目的地的行进时间。在促进履行库存支架50处的订单的上下文中,漂移可用于将库存物品42收集到库存支架50附近使得其在限定区域80变得可用时就在附近。未来可期望一个或多个额订单保持器40需要漂移的库存物品42。因此,根据较不复杂的技术可减少置换和/或取代安放在库存支架50处的库存物品42所需的时间。Inventory system 10 may facilitate fulfillment of orders at inventory holders 50 according to the order packaging arrangement using a technique referred to herein as "drifting." Drifting may allow components of inventory system 10 to be moved or otherwise positioned toward a particular destination during the completion of a particular task involving that element in order to reduce travel time to the associated destination. In the context of facilitating fulfillment of orders at inventory holder 50 , drifting may be used to collect inventory items 42 near inventory holder 50 so that they are nearby when defined area 80 becomes available. It may be expected that one or more order holders 40 will require drifting inventory items 42 in the future. Accordingly, the time required to replace and/or replace inventory items 42 deposited at inventory holders 50 may be reduced according to less complex techniques.

“漂移”位置90表示仓库中的库存站附近指定用于承载库存保持器的移动驱动单元“漂移”直至适当时间来包装订单需要的库存的位置。漂移位置90可用作其中可在特定时间且/或按需要沿库存支架50将受欢迎库存物品42置换入限定区域80和从其中置换出的位置。例如,漂移位置90可用于将库存物品42为低且最近已被存储更高速度库存物品42的另一库存保持器30所取代的库存保持器30保持在库存支架50附近。管理模块15可通过在订单保持器40到达库存支架50处时将这些库存保持器30保持在库存支架50附近,诸如使其可放置在限定区域80中的一个而实现各个效率。因此,系统10的一些实施方案可利用漂移来预期要完成的任务且定位相关组件以减少完成预期任务所需的时间。漂移可减少由于使用较不复杂技术而造成的拥塞。利用漂移位置90可容许履行涉及由库存系统10完成若干任务的特定订单,同时减少库存系统10完成这些任务且改善系统吞吐量所花费的时间。漂移可额外或是替代地容许更有效使用库存系统10内的有限物理面积。本文描述了包括漂移位置90的库存系统10的实例实施方案。A "drift" location 90 represents a location near an inventory station in a warehouse where a mobile drive unit designated to carry inventory holders "drifts" until the appropriate time to pack the inventory needed for an order. Drift location 90 may serve as a location where popular inventory items 42 may be swapped into and out of defined area 80 along inventory holder 50 at specific times and/or as needed. For example, the drift position 90 may be used to hold an inventory holder 30 near the inventory holder 50 that has an inventory item 42 that is low and has recently been replaced by another inventory holder 30 that stores higher velocity inventory items 42 . Management module 15 may achieve various efficiencies by keeping order holders 40 near inventory holders 50 as they arrive at inventory holders 50 , such as by enabling placement in one of defined areas 80 . Accordingly, some embodiments of system 10 may utilize drift to anticipate tasks to be accomplished and locate relevant components to reduce the time required to complete the expected tasks. Drifting reduces congestion due to the use of less sophisticated techniques. Utilizing drift locations 90 may allow fulfillment of specific orders that involve several tasks being completed by inventory system 10, while reducing the time it takes inventory system 10 to complete these tasks and improving system throughput. Drifting may additionally or alternatively allow for more efficient use of the limited physical area within inventory system 10 . An example embodiment of inventory system 10 including drift locations 90 is described herein.

管理模块15可响应于检测到第一触发事件(多个事件)而确定发送特定库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34到特定漂移位置90。在特定实施方案中,相关元件可保留在特定漂移空间90或特定组的漂移位置90中,直至发生第二触发事件(或多个事件)。在第二触发事件发生之后,元件然后可朝向相关系统资源移动以完成任务。在特定实施方案中,空间在统计上可指定为漂移位置90,而在替代实施方案中,取决于库存系统10所需的资源、空间74的可用性和/或其它适当考虑,空间可动态指定为漂移位置90。如下文进一步所述,可以各种方式利用漂移位置90以改善吞吐量或是以其它方式提高库存系统10的特定实施方案的系统效率,包括但不限于促进履行库存支架50处的订单。Management module 15 may determine to send a particular inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to a particular drift location 90 in response to detecting the first trigger event(s). In particular embodiments, the associated element may remain in a particular drift space 90 or a particular set of drift locations 90 until a second triggering event (or events) occurs. After the second trigger event occurs, the element can then move toward the associated system resource to complete the task. In certain embodiments, the space may be statistically designated as the drift location 90, while in an alternative embodiment, depending on the resources required by the inventory system 10, the availability of the space 74, and/or other appropriate considerations, the space may be dynamically designated as Drift position 90. As described further below, drift locations 90 may be utilized in various ways to improve throughput or otherwise increase system efficiency of particular embodiments of inventory system 10 , including but not limited to facilitating fulfillment of orders at inventory holders 50 .

管理模块15可响应于第一触发事件(诸如确定各自保持器中的库存量降低到低于预定量)确定将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34移离库存支架50。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定新近耗尽的库存保持器30的库存物品42在欢迎度上已降低到其它库存物品42之下。漂移位置90可因此用于将库存保持器30和低库存物品42保持在库存支架50附近,使得其可视需要使用以履行库存物品42的订单。作为另一实例,特定库存保持器30可包括在产品速度上有所降低的库存物品42且更受欢迎的物品被移动到在其处先前安放库存保持器30的限定区域80处。与其库存保持器30保持这些库存物品42到库存存储48,例如,该库存保持器30可移动到漂移位置90使得其可用于库存支架50附近用于未来的订单。然而,管理模块15可确定库存物品42仍比存储在库存存储48中且/或期望不久的将来的订单所需的其它物品相对更受欢迎。如果在不久的将来需要这些库存保持器30,那么可以通过将这些库存保持器30留在库存支架50附近而非将库存保持器30移动到库存存储48来实现更大的效率。Management module 15 may determine to move inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 from inventory holder 50 in response to a first trigger event, such as determining that the amount of inventory in the respective holder has dropped below a predetermined amount. In some implementations, management module 15 may determine that inventory item 42 of a newly depleted inventory holder 30 has dropped below other inventory items 42 in popularity. Drift locations 90 may thus be used to hold inventory holders 30 and low-stock items 42 near inventory holders 50 so that they may be used as needed to fulfill orders for inventory items 42 . As another example, a particular stock holder 30 may contain stock items 42 that are reduced in product velocity and the more popular items moved to the defined area 80 where the stock holder 30 was previously seated. Rather than holding these inventory items 42 to inventory storage 48 with its inventory holder 30 , for example, the inventory holder 30 may be moved to a drift position 90 so that it is available near the inventory holder 50 for future orders. However, management module 15 may determine that inventory item 42 is still relatively more popular than other items stored in inventory store 48 and/or expected for near future orders. If these inventory holders 30 are needed in the near future, greater efficiencies may be realized by leaving these inventory holders 30 near the inventory holder 50 rather than moving the inventory holders 30 to the inventory storage 48 .

如所示,若干漂移位置90a至90d安置在库存支架50附近。如所示,特定库存保持器30a可响应于管理模块15检测到上述触发事件中的一个而移动到漂移位置90a,这可造成管理模块15将库存保持器30a从限定区域80a传送到漂移空间90a。As shown, several drift locations 90 a - 90 d are positioned near inventory holder 50 . As shown, a particular inventory holder 30a may move to a drift position 90a in response to management module 15 detecting one of the aforementioned triggering events, which may cause management module 15 to transfer inventory holder 30a from defined area 80a to drift space 90a .

随着其它库存保持器30漂移,库存保持器30a可在漂移位置90a至90d中的一个或多个处漂移。在一些实施方案中,漂移位置90a至90d可用作库存保持器30的随机访问缓冲器。因此,库存保持器30可被指派给随机可用的漂移位置90a至90d。库存保持器30可留在指派的漂移位置90a至90d中,直至发生第二触发事件。额外或是替代地,漂移位置可用作连续队列。库存保持器30可在连续位置可用时漂移通过位置90a至90d。然而,应注意,虽然漂移位置90a至90d图示为彼此邻接,但这不无需是必需如此。在一些实施方案中,漂移位置90可以是连续的且/或彼此分开。此外,在一些实施方案中,漂移位置90可适当位于分散定位的漂移位置90的组。响应于检测到第二触发事件,管理模块15可确定将库存保持器30a沿库存支架50移回到限定区域80。例如,需要库存保持器30a存储的库存物品42的库存保持器40可被运送到库存支架50且/或期望在不久的将来被运送到库存支架50。如所示,本技术可适当利用若干库存保持器30a-30c以在库存支架50附近漂移各个保持器。因此,这些库存保持器30将可用于比另外使用复杂技术所做般更快速地安放在限定区域80处。As the other inventory holders 30 drift, inventory holder 30a may drift at one or more of drift locations 90a-90d. In some embodiments, drift locations 90 a - 90 d may be used as a random access buffer for inventory keeper 30 . Accordingly, inventory holders 30 may be assigned to randomly available drift positions 90a-90d. Inventory holder 30 may remain in assigned drift position 90a - 90d until a second triggering event occurs. Additionally or alternatively, drift positions can be used as a continuous queue. Inventory holder 30 may drift through positions 90a through 90d as successive positions become available. It should be noted, however, that while the drift locations 90a-90d are illustrated as being adjacent to each other, this need not necessarily be the case. In some embodiments, drift positions 90 may be contiguous and/or separated from each other. Furthermore, in some embodiments, drift locations 90 may be suitably located in groups of dispersedly positioned drift locations 90 . In response to detecting the second trigger event, management module 15 may determine to move inventory holder 30a back along inventory holder 50 to defined area 80 . For example, inventory holders 40 that require inventory holders 30a to store inventory items 42 may be shipped to inventory holder 50 and/or are expected to be shipped to inventory holder 50 in the near future. As shown, the present technique may suitably utilize several inventory holders 30 a - 30 c to drift each holder about inventory holder 50 . Accordingly, these inventory holders 30 will be available for placement at the defined area 80 more quickly than would otherwise be done using complex techniques.

作为造成管理模块15确定漂移库存保持器30的触发事件的另一实例,可确定期望限定区域80b处的库存保持器30b已耗尽且/或库存物品42即将耗尽,因此,库存保持器30c可在期望库存保持器30c将尽快取代库存保持器30b的情况下被运送到漂移位置90d。库存保持器30c可例如存储由库存保持器30b存储的SKU的相同SKU的额外库存物品42。作为另一实例,可期望期望库存30b的库存物品42降落低于特定相对产品速度且库存保持器30c中的物品42可具有相对更高的产品速度。库存物品30c可在漂移位置90d中就绪以在适当时取代库存保持器30b中的这些物品。As another example of a triggering event that causes management module 15 to determine a drifting inventory holder 30, it may be determined that inventory holder 30b at desired defined area 80b is depleted and/or that inventory items 42 are about to be depleted, and therefore, inventory holder 30c Can be transported to drift location 90d with the expectation that inventory holder 30c will replace inventory holder 30b as soon as possible. Inventory holder 30c may, for example, store additional inventory items 42 of the same SKU of the SKU stored by inventory holder 30b. As another example, it may be desirable that inventory items 42 of desired inventory 30b fall below a certain relative product velocity and items 42 in inventory holder 30c may have a relatively higher product velocity. Inventory items 30c may be made ready in drift position 90d to replace those items in inventory holder 30b as appropriate.

在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定漂移一个或多个订单保持器40。管理模块15可响应于检测到第一触发事件确定漂移一个或多个订单保持器40。第一触发事件可例如确定库存支架50的工作量超过预定和/或最大量。例如,库存支架50处的所有可用位置可由其它订单保持器40占用。管理模块15可指示移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到接近库存支架50的漂移位置90。响应于第二触发事件,管理模块15可指示移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40从漂移位置90运离库存支架50。例如,第二触发事件可确定库存支架50的工作量低于预定和/或最大量。可触发订单保持器40的漂移的触发事件的其它实例包括确定具有由订单保持器40中的一个或多个订单请求的库存物品42的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34未在库存支架50处,但是在不久的将来将在库存支架50处。例如,具有请求的库存物品42的库存保持器30本身可以在漂移位置90中。作为另一实例,如下文更详细讨论,货板保持器34可以经历旋转操纵的过程。因此,管理模块15可确定漂移订单保持器40直至所需库存保持器30和和/或货板保持器34位于库存支架50处。此外,如果管理模块15确定订单保持器40所请求的额外库存物品42在不久的将来将被运送到库存支架50,那么在接收库存支架50处的库存物品42之后,订单保持器40可被发送到漂移位置。订单保持器40可在移动到漂移位置90之前首先接收这些订单保持器40中的订单请求的所有可用库存物品42。然而,在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可在一些情况下确定将订单保持器40发送到库存存储48中的位置。例如,订单保持器40可请求只在库存支架50处可用但是未被调度成运送到库存支架50直至在度过大于预定阈值的一定量的时间之后的库存物品42。替代或是除此之外,管理模块15可基于这些订单保持器40在引导站54装配时起的时间量而选择特定订单保持器40来运送到库存支架50。In some embodiments, management module 15 may determine to drift one or more order holders 40 . Management module 15 may determine to drift one or more order holders 40 in response to detecting the first trigger event. The first trigger event may, for example, be a determination that the workload of inventory holder 50 exceeds a predetermined and/or maximum amount. For example, all available positions at inventory holder 50 may be occupied by other order holders 40 . Management module 15 may instruct mobile drive unit 20 to transport order holder 40 to drift location 90 proximate to inventory holder 50 . In response to the second trigger event, management module 15 may instruct mobile drive unit 20 to transport order holder 40 from drift location 90 away from inventory holder 50 . For example, the second trigger event may determine that the workload of inventory holder 50 is below a predetermined and/or maximum amount. Other examples of triggering events that may trigger drift of an order holder 40 include determining that an inventory holder 30 and/or a pallet holder 34 with an inventory item 42 requested by one or more orders in the order holder 40 is not in stock bracket 50, but will be at stock bracket 50 in the near future. For example, the inventory holder 30 with the requested inventory item 42 may itself be in the drift location 90 . As another example, as discussed in more detail below, the pallet holder 34 may undergo a process of rotational manipulation. Accordingly, management module 15 may determine to drift order holders 40 until the desired inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 are located at inventory holders 50 . Additionally, if the management module 15 determines that additional inventory items 42 requested by the order holder 40 will be shipped to the inventory holder 50 in the near future, the order holder 40 may be dispatched after receiving the inventory item 42 at the inventory holder 50 to the drift position. The order holders 40 may first receive all available inventory items 42 for an order request in those order holders 40 before moving to the drift location 90 . However, in some embodiments, management module 15 may determine where to send order holder 40 to inventory store 48 in some cases. For example, order holder 40 may request inventory items 42 that are only available at inventory holder 50 but are not scheduled for shipment to inventory holder 50 until after an amount of time greater than a predetermined threshold has elapsed. Alternatively or in addition, management module 15 may select particular order holders 40 to ship to inventory holder 50 based on an amount of time since those order holders 40 were assembled at induction station 54 .

图5还图示旋转安放在库存支架50处的限定区域80中的货板保持器34a的技术。首先,管理模块15可确定响应于任何适当触发事件旋转货板保持器34a。例如,库存支架50的操作器可指示在最接近库存支架50的侧上的库存物品42为低,而货板保持器34a的另一侧上的其它库存物品仍可用(但是操作器可能无法接达)。因此,管理模块15可指示移动驱动单元20移动到货板保持器34a且/或执行旋转操纵。移动驱动单元20可在货板保持器34a下方移动。移动驱动单元20然后可对接、耦合或以其它方式连接到货板保持器34a。移动驱动单元20然后可将货板保持器34a移离库存支架使得货板保持器34a可旋转。货板保持器34a可移离适当量使得只有足够空间用于选择货板保持器34a而不与位于库存支架50处的其它库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34碰撞。如步骤二所示,货板保持器34a可选择180度。在步骤三,货板保持器34a可被移回库存支架50之处。虽然图示为旋转180度,但是货板保持器34a可旋转任何适当量,包括90度、270度或任何其它适当量。FIG. 5 also illustrates the technique of rotating the pallet holder 34 a seated in a defined area 80 at the inventory holder 50 . First, the management module 15 may determine to rotate the pallet holder 34a in response to any suitable triggering event. For example, the operator of the inventory holder 50 may indicate that the inventory item 42 on the side closest to the inventory holder 50 is low, while other inventory items on the other side of the pallet holder 34a are still available (but the operator may not be able to access them). up to). Accordingly, management module 15 may instruct mobile drive unit 20 to move to pallet holder 34a and/or perform a rotational maneuver. The mobile drive unit 20 is movable under the pallet holder 34a. Mobile drive unit 20 may then be docked, coupled, or otherwise connected to pallet holder 34a. Mobile drive unit 20 may then move pallet holder 34a away from the inventory holder such that pallet holder 34a may rotate. The pallet holder 34a can be moved away by an appropriate amount so that there is only enough room for the pallet holder 34a to be selected without colliding with other inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 located at the inventory holder 50 . As shown in step 2, the pallet holder 34a can choose 180 degrees. In step three, the pallet holder 34a can be moved back to the inventory holder 50 . Although illustrated as being rotated 180 degrees, the pallet holder 34a may be rotated any suitable amount, including 90 degrees, 270 degrees, or any other suitable amount.

图5还图示用于沿库存支架50移动库存保持器40的特定技术,以促进库存支架50的一个或多个操作器的效率。如所示,库存支架50包括两个区100和102,每个操作器一个。如所示,区100和102可基于库存支架50的操作和订单保持器40的到达而改变和/或重叠。可指示操作器在初始方向上移动以在订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动时从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34挑选库存物品。初始方向可以是与订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动的方向相同的方向。在图示中,库存保持器40从左移到右,且操作器主要从左移到右。一旦操作器在初始方向移动时到达区100的终端,那么可指示操作器返回到区100中图示为库存支架50的最远离的左边点的起始点。在返回到区100的起始点之后,操作器可再次开始在初始方向上移动以满足将库存物品42移动到订单保持器40的容器60中的更多请求。订单保持器40可移动到与保持订单保持器40中的订单请求的库存物品42的特定库存保持器30的限定区域80相对的位置。一旦订单保持器40到达适当位置,那么订单保持器40可减慢且/或停止,直至操作器完成库存物品42到订单保持器40的适当容器60中的传送。订单保持器40可在操作器在初始方向上移动时从操作器接收库存物品42。类似模式可用于其它区的操作器,包括区102。在一些实施方案中,可对订单保持器40的到达定时使得订单保持器40在操作器沿区100在初始方向上移动时到达。替代地或是除此之外,库存支架50的操作器可在两个方向上适当移动以移动到准备接收库存物品42的订单保持器40。FIG. 5 also illustrates certain techniques for moving inventory holder 40 along inventory holder 50 to facilitate the efficiency of one or more operators of inventory holder 50 . As shown, inventory holder 50 includes two zones 100 and 102, one for each operator. As shown, zones 100 and 102 may change and/or overlap based on the operation of inventory holder 50 and the arrival of order holder 40 . The operator may be instructed to move in an initial direction to pick inventory items from the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 as the order holder 40 moves along the inventory holder 50 . The initial direction may be the same direction that the order holder 40 is moving along the inventory holder 50 . In the illustration, the inventory holder 40 moves from left to right and the operator moves primarily from left to right. Once the operator reaches the end of zone 100 while moving in the initial direction, the operator may be instructed to return to the starting point in zone 100 illustrated as the furthest left point of inventory holder 50 . After returning to the starting point of zone 100 , the operator may begin moving in the original direction again to satisfy more requests to move inventory items 42 into containers 60 of order holder 40 . The order holder 40 is movable to a position opposite the defined area 80 of the particular stock holder 30 that holds the order requested inventory items 42 in the order holder 40 . Once the order holder 40 is in place, the order holder 40 may be slowed and/or stopped until the operator completes the transfer of the inventory item 42 into the appropriate container 60 of the order holder 40 . The order holder 40 may receive inventory items 42 from the operator as the operator moves in the initial direction. Similar patterns can be used for operators in other zones, including zone 102 . In some embodiments, the arrival of the order holder 40 may be timed such that the order holder 40 arrives as the operator moves along the zone 100 in an initial direction. Alternatively or in addition, the manipulator of inventory holder 50 may be moved in both directions as appropriate to move to order holder 40 ready to receive inventory item 42 .

如所示,指示器64沿库存支架50被布置在与库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的限定区域80相对的各个点。随着订单保持器40沿库存支架50移动,可启动指示器以指示操作器期望库存支架订单保持器40沿库存支架50停止或减慢的地方。指示器64通常可安置成与每个限定区域80相对。应注意,虽然图示为分散指示器64,但是将可使用其中将为订单保持器40的任何适当传达方法。例如,显示屏幕可沿库存支架50安置在各个位置,指示操作器50期望订单保持器40在何处停止和/或减慢且可额外指示操作器从库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34移动哪个物品42。As shown, the indicators 64 are disposed at various points along the inventory holder 50 opposite a defined area 80 of the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 . As the order holder 40 moves along the inventory holder 50 , an indicator may be activated to indicate where the operator expects the inventory holder order holder 40 to stop or slow down along the inventory holder 50 . Indicators 64 may generally be positioned opposite each defined area 80 . It should be noted that while illustrated as a scatter indicator 64, any suitable method of communication, which would be the order holder 40, would be used. For example, display screens may be placed at various locations along the inventory holder 50, indicating where the operator 50 expects the order holder 40 to stop and/or slow down and may additionally indicate where 34 Which item to move 42.

在所图示的实施方案中,订单保持器40a将在接近指示器64a时停止。管理模块15可因此启动指示器64a。操作器可行进到指示器64a。在指示器64a处,操作器可将适当库存物品42从与指示器64a相对的库存保持器30放置到订单保持器40a的适当容器60中。在一些实施方案中,库存支架50处的指示器64a或一些其它件的设备可指示操作器挑选特定库存物品42且/或指示操作器将特定库存物品42放置到订单保持器40a的特定容器60中。例如,指示器可显示灯或其它视觉指示器,指示哪个容器60将从给定库存保持器50接收库存物品42。类似地,在第二工作区102中,其它操作器可从指示器64b接收指示订单保持器40b将在接近指示器64b时停止且/或减慢的信号。根据这些技术,可在库存支架50处以比另外方式可能的更有效方式履行订单。In the illustrated embodiment, the order holder 40a will stop when approaching the indicator 64a. Management module 15 may thus activate indicator 64a. The operator may travel to indicator 64a. At indicator 64a, the operator may place the appropriate inventory item 42 from the inventory holder 30 opposite indicator 64a into the appropriate container 60 of order holder 40a. In some embodiments, an indicator 64a or some other piece of equipment at the inventory holder 50 may instruct the operator to pick a particular inventory item 42 and/or instruct the operator to place a particular inventory item 42 into a particular receptacle 60 of the order holder 40a. middle. For example, the indicator may display lights or other visual indicators indicating which container 60 will receive inventory items 42 from a given inventory holder 50 . Similarly, in the second work zone 102, other operators may receive a signal from the indicator 64b indicating that the order holder 40b will stop and/or slow down as it approaches the indicator 64b. According to these techniques, orders can be fulfilled at inventory holder 50 in a more efficient manner than would otherwise be possible.

移动驱动单元20可操作以避免在沿库存支架50移动时与其它移动驱动单元20碰撞。例如,随着订单保持器40a沿库存支架50移动,管理模块15可确定接收库存物品42的下个位置。管理模块15可确定另一订单保持器40b是否阻挡订单保持器40a与下个位置之间的路径。如果订单保持器40b未阻挡且没有其它的阻挡,那么管理模块15可启动下个位置处的指示器64a且移动驱动单元20可将订单保持器40a运送到指示器64a。如果订单保持器40b如此进行,那么管理模块15可确定订单保持器40b的目的地。如果订单保持器40b的目的地越过订单保持器40a的下个位置,那么可启动指示器64a。否则,管理模块15可延迟指示器64a的启动,直至订单保持器40b不再沿订单保持器40a的路径具有阻挡目的地且/或清除订单保持器40a希望的路径。此方法还避免了操作器因为操作器将知道指示器64启动对应于先前订单保持器40而混乱。Mobile drive units 20 are operable to avoid collisions with other mobile drive units 20 while moving along inventory holder 50 . For example, as order holder 40a moves along inventory rack 50 , management module 15 may determine the next location to receive inventory item 42 . The management module 15 may determine whether another order holder 40b is blocking the path between the order holder 40a and the next location. If order holder 40b is unobstructed and there are no other obstructions, management module 15 may activate indicator 64a at the next location and mobile drive unit 20 may transport order holder 40a to indicator 64a. If order holder 40b does so, management module 15 may determine the destination of order holder 40b. Indicator 64a may be activated if the destination of order holder 40b is past the next location of order holder 40a. Otherwise, the management module 15 may delay activation of the indicator 64a until the order holder 40b no longer has blocking destinations along the path of the order holder 40a and/or clears the desired path of the order holder 40a. This method also avoids operator confusion as the operator will know that the activation of the indicator 64 corresponds to the previous order holder 40 .

图6是图示使用库存支架填充订单的实例方法600的流程图。方法600始于步骤602,其中管理模块15选择要安放在库存支架50处的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。可根据任何适当算法、逻辑和/或决策过程进行选择。下文参考图7更详细地讨论步骤602可如何实施的更多细节阐述。FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example method 600 of filling an order using an inventory holder. Method 600 begins at step 602 where management module 15 selects an inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to be placed at inventory holder 50 . Selection can be made according to any suitable algorithm, logic and/or decision process. Further details of how step 602 may be implemented are discussed in more detail below with reference to FIG. 7 .

在604,在选择适当库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34安放在库存支架50处之后,管理模块15指示移动驱动单元20将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34运送到库存支架50。移动驱动单元20可根据上文讨论的技术检索所选库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34且将其运送库存支架50的适当限定区域80。At 604, after selecting the appropriate inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to place at the inventory holder 50, the management module 15 instructs the mobile drive unit 20 to transport the inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to the inventory Bracket 50. Mobile drive unit 20 may retrieve and transport the selected inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 to the appropriately defined area 80 of inventory holder 50 according to the techniques discussed above.

在步骤606,管理模块15可确定库存支架50处的限定区域80是否仍可用。如果额外限定区域80仍待填充,那么所述方法可返回到步骤602,在其中可选择额外库存保持器30和/或货板保持器24安放在库存保支架50。应注意,虽然图示为依序进行,但是管理模块15可大体同时为每个限定区域80选择所有库存保持器。此外,步骤602到606可在库存系统10内按库存物品42变化所需随时且/或连续发生。此外,在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定使一些限定区域80未填充。管理模块15无需在库存支架50处指定所有限定区域80用于库存保持器30和货板保持器34。例如,管理模块15可由于工作量约束、总体系统活动或其它各种因素而使一些限定区域未填充。替代地或是额外地,一个或多个限定区域80可指定为垃圾保持器36或其它废料容器的位置。在一些实施方案中,垃圾保持器36和/或废料容器可操作为由移动驱动单元20运送。因此,由库存支架50废料产生的包装材料和/或其它废弃产品可放入限定区域80处的垃圾保持器36中。在适当时间和/或当充满时,垃圾保持器36可由移动驱动单元20被运离库存支架50。At step 606 , management module 15 may determine whether defined area 80 at inventory holder 50 is still usable. If the additional defined area 80 remains to be filled, the method may return to step 602 where additional inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 24 may optionally be placed on the inventory holding rack 50 . It should be noted that although shown sequentially, management module 15 may select all inventory holders for each defined area 80 substantially simultaneously. In addition, steps 602 through 606 may occur as often as necessary and/or continuously within inventory system 10 as inventory items 42 change. Additionally, in some embodiments, management module 15 may determine to leave some defined areas 80 unpopulated. Management module 15 need not designate all defined areas 80 at inventory holders 50 for inventory holders 30 and pallet holders 34 . For example, management module 15 may leave some defined areas unpopulated due to workload constraints, overall system activity, or various other factors. Alternatively or additionally, one or more defined areas 80 may be designated as locations for waste holders 36 or other waste receptacles. In some embodiments, the waste holder 36 and/or waste container are operable to be carried by the mobile drive unit 20 . Accordingly, packaging material and/or other waste products resulting from waste from inventory holder 50 may be placed into waste holder 36 at defined area 80 . At the appropriate time and/or when full, the waste holder 36 may be transported away from the inventory holder 50 by the mobile drive unit 20 .

在步骤608,管理模块15可接收各个库存物品42的订单。例如,库存系统10可随时接收订单。还应注意,可在步骤602到606所述的指派库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34给限定区域80的过程之前、期间和之后接收订单。因此,步骤608可依序且/或与步骤602到606并行地进行。此外,当适当重新指派新库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34给限定区域80时可接收订单。At step 608 , the management module 15 may receive an order for each inventory item 42 . For example, inventory system 10 may receive orders at any time. It should also be noted that orders may be received before, during, and after the process of assigning inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 to the defined area 80 described in steps 602 to 606 . Accordingly, step 608 may be performed sequentially and/or in parallel with steps 602-606. Additionally, orders may be received when new inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 are appropriately reassigned to the defined area 80 .

在步骤610,管理模块15可确定是否满足库存支架50处的订单上的库存物品42的一个或多个请求。例如,基于库存支架50处的分配和/或总工作量,管理模块15可确定填充库存站56而非库存支架50的所有和/或部分订单。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可确定填充库存站56处的部分订单和库存支架50处的部分订单。管理模块15还可在填充订单时为所述订单确定要访问的库存站56和/或库存支架50的序列。序列可以是任何适当序列,包括首先访问一个或多个库存站56或首先访问一个或多个库存支架50。替代地或是额外地,管理模块15可确定要布置的适当类型的订单保持器40。例如,订单保持器40可布置为唯库存支架订单保持器40、混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存站订单保持器40。可根据任何前述工作平衡和/或分配技术进行如何处理给定订单的决策过程。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可在订单保持器40处于接收库存物品42的过程时确定将订单保持器40发送到何处。例如,管理模块15可确定用位于库存支架50处的库存物品42填充保持器40上的订单和/或部分订单。相反,管理模块15可确定填充库存站56处的订单保持器40上的订单和/或部分订单。在接收这些库存物品42之后,管理模块15可确定是否用库存支架50和/或库存站56处的库存物品42填充订单保持器40上的额外订单和/或额外订单线。作为实例,管理模块15可基于检验订单保持器40上请求未被接收的库存物品42的订单的打开线确定将订单保持器40送到何处且/或确定库存物品42将位于库存系统10中何处。此外或是替代地,管理模块15可确定一个或多个库存支架50和库存站56处的填充订单,但是在指示移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到一个或多个这些位置之前可决定等待预定量时间。例如,基于上文所讨论的一个或多个触发事件,管理模块15可在继续填充订单保持器40之前确定将订单保持器40运送到漂移位置。作为另一实例,管理模块15可基于库存系统10的一个或多个状况确定延迟装配特定订单。管理模块15可因此在确定是否填充订单和/或首先填充另一订单时还考虑待决的订单已有多长时间。In step 610 , management module 15 may determine whether one or more requests for inventory items 42 on the order at inventory holder 50 are satisfied. For example, based on the allocation and/or total workload at inventory holder 50 , management module 15 may determine all and/or a portion of the order to fill inventory station 56 but not inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, management module 15 may determine to fill the partial order at inventory station 56 and the partial order at inventory holder 50 . Management module 15 may also determine the sequence of inventory stations 56 and/or inventory holders 50 to visit for an order when filling the order. The sequence may be any suitable sequence, including visiting one or more inventory stations 56 first or visiting one or more inventory holders 50 first. Alternatively or additionally, the management module 15 may determine the appropriate type of order holder 40 to place. For example, the order holder 40 may be arranged as an inventory rack only order holder 40 , a hybrid order holder 40 and/or a stock station only order holder 40 . The decision process of how to process a given order can be made in accordance with any of the aforementioned work balancing and/or allocation techniques. In some embodiments, management module 15 may determine where to send order holder 40 while order holder 40 is in the process of receiving inventory items 42 . For example, management module 15 may determine to fill an order and/or a portion of an order on holder 40 with inventory items 42 located at inventory holder 50 . Instead, management module 15 may determine to fill orders and/or portions of orders on order holders 40 at inventory stations 56 . After receiving these inventory items 42 , management module 15 may determine whether to fill additional orders and/or additional order lines on order holder 40 with inventory items 42 at inventory racks 50 and/or inventory stations 56 . As an example, the management module 15 may determine where to send the order holder 40 and/or determine that the inventory item 42 will be located in the inventory system 10 based on checking an open line on the order holder 40 for an order requesting an inventory item 42 that has not been received. where. Additionally or alternatively, management module 15 may determine fill orders at one or more inventory racks 50 and inventory stations 56, but may decide to do so before instructing mobile drive unit 20 to ship order holder 40 to one or more of these locations. Wait for a predetermined amount of time. For example, based on one or more of the triggering events discussed above, management module 15 may determine to ship order holder 40 to a drift location before continuing to fill order holder 40 . As another example, management module 15 may determine to delay assembling a particular order based on one or more conditions of inventory system 10 . Management module 15 may therefore also consider how long an order has been pending when determining whether to fill an order and/or fill another order first.

在步骤612,管理模块15可确定要运送到库存支架50以填充订单的订单保持器40的布置。例如,管理模块15可确定将两个或多个订单分组到特定订单保持器40中使得两个订单可由一个订单保持器40完成。下文参考图8讨论可如何根据库存系统10的实例操作完成步骤612的更多细节。在步骤614,在布置订单保持器40之后,管理模块15可指示一个或多个移动驱动单元将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50使得物品可被接收到订单保持器40的容器60中。应注意,可基于管理模块确定在步骤610处布置的订单保持器40的类型执行步骤612。此外,虽然图示为在管理模块15确定填充库存支架50处的所有和/或部分订单时进行,但是步骤612可甚至在管理模块15确定在步骤624填充库存站56处的订单时执行。例如,管理模块15可确定将订单布置到唯库存站保持器40中且/或可与在库存站56处指定来填充的其它订单一起将所述订单分组到订单保持器40上。At step 612 , management module 15 may determine the placement of order holders 40 to be shipped to inventory holder 50 to fill the order. For example, management module 15 may determine to group two or more orders into a particular order holder 40 such that two orders can be fulfilled by one order holder 40 . Further details of how step 612 may be accomplished in accordance with an example operation of inventory system 10 are discussed below with reference to FIG. 8 . At step 614 , after order holders 40 are deployed, management module 15 may instruct one or more mobile drive units to transport order holders 40 to inventory holders 50 so that items may be received into containers 60 of order holders 40 . It should be noted that step 612 may be performed based on the management module determining the type of order holder 40 deployed at step 610 . Furthermore, while illustrated as being performed when management module 15 determines to fill all and/or a portion of the order at inventory holder 50 , step 612 may be performed even when management module 15 determines to fill the order at inventory station 56 at step 624 . For example, management module 15 may determine to place the order into stock-only station holder 40 and/or may group the order on order holder 40 with other orders designated for filling at stock station 56 .

在步骤616,移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40移动到沿库存支架50的位置,使得订单保持器40可根据与保持的每个容器60相关联的订单接收库存物品42。容器60可在步骤618根据其相关联订单接收库存物品42。例如,库存支架50处的操作器可在订单保持器40停止和/或减慢的位置处将适当库存物品42传送到订单保持器40的适当容器60中。At step 616 , mobile drive unit 20 moves order holder 40 to a position along inventory holder 50 such that order holder 40 can receive inventory item 42 according to the order associated with each container 60 held. Container 60 may receive inventory item 42 according to its associated order at step 618 . For example, the operator at the inventory holder 50 may transfer the appropriate inventory item 42 into the appropriate container 60 of the order holder 40 at the point where the order holder 40 is stopped and/or slowed down.

在步骤620,在库存支架50处接收库存物品42之后,管理模块15可确定是否完成订单保持器40中的订单。如果订单完成,那么在步骤622,管理模块15可指示移动驱动20将订单保持器40运送到库存站56和/或装运站58用于装运准备和/或装运到最终目的地。如果订单保持器40上的一个或多个订单未完成,那么所述方法可进行到步骤610,其中管理模块15可确定是否填充库存支架50和/或库存站56处的订单保持器40上的订单的剩余开线。例如,管理模块15可在步骤610确定订单保持器40上的订单请求的额外物品在不久的将来将可用于库存支架50。管理模块15可因此指示移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50附近的漂移位置90中且/或等待该库存变得可用。作为另一实例,管理模块15可在步骤610确定订单保持器40上的订单的开线请求位于库存存储48中的库存物品42。At step 620 , after receiving inventory items 42 at inventory holder 50 , management module 15 may determine whether the order in order holder 40 is complete. If the order is complete, then at step 622 the management module 15 may instruct the mobile drive 20 to transport the order holder 40 to the inventory station 56 and/or the shipping station 58 for shipment preparation and/or shipment to the final destination. If one or more orders on the order holder 40 are outstanding, the method may proceed to step 610, where the management module 15 may determine whether to fill the order holder 40 at the inventory rack 50 and/or at the inventory station 56. The remaining open lines of the order. For example, management module 15 may determine at step 610 that additional items requested by the order on order holder 40 will be available for inventory holder 50 in the near future. Management module 15 may thus instruct mobile drive unit 20 to ship order holder 40 into drift location 90 near inventory holder 50 and/or wait for the inventory to become available. As another example, management module 15 may determine at step 610 that an open line request for an order on order holder 40 requests inventory item 42 located in inventory storage 48 .

管理模块15可在步骤624指示移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到库存站56,使得可在步骤628接收应当放置在订单保持器40的容器60中的任何物品。例如,管理模块15可确定填充在库存站56处的唯库存站订单保持器40和/或混合订单保持器40上的订单线。步骤624可在移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到库存支架50之前、之后和/或交替进行。Management module 15 may instruct mobile drive unit 20 to ship order holder 40 to inventory station 56 at step 624 so that any items that should be placed in container 60 of order holder 40 may be received at step 628 . For example, the management module 15 may determine the order lines that are populated on the stock-only order holder 40 and/or the mixed order holder 40 at the stock station 56 . Step 624 may occur before, after, and/or alternately before mobile drive unit 20 transports order holder 40 to inventory holder 50 .

在步骤626,虽然订单保持器40位于库存站56处,但是管理模块15可在库存存储48中定位库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中存储的库存物品42。基于所存储的库存物品42的位置,管理模块15可指示一个或多个移动驱动单元20移动到在库存存储48内存储这些库存物品42的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的位置。在步骤626,移动驱动单元20可将存储所请求库存物品42的所述库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34运送到库存站56。At step 626 , while the order holder 40 is located at the inventory station 56 , the management module 15 may locate the inventory item 42 stored in the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 in the inventory store 48 . Based on the stored locations of inventory items 42, management module 15 may instruct one or more mobile drive units 20 to move to the locations of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 that store those inventory items 42 within inventory storage 48. . At step 626 , mobile drive unit 20 may transport the inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 storing the requested inventory item 42 to inventory station 56 .

在步骤628,可由订单保持器40的适当容器60接收库存保持器30存储且被运送到库存站56的库存物品42。在容器60从库存保持器30接收所请求库存物品42之后,管理模块15确定是否在步骤630完成订单。如果存在未完成订单,那么所述方法600可返回到步骤610,管理模块15确定是否填充库存支架50和/或库存站56处的订单保持器40中的订单的额外线。如果确定填充库存站56处的订单的额外线,那么订单保持器40可留在库存站56处且含有额外请求库存物品42的额外库存保持器30可被运送到库存站56。如果确定填充库存支架50处的订单的额外线,那么所述方法可继续到步骤614,其中订单保持器40可被运送到库存支架50。方法600继续,直至在步骤620或630处完成订单保持器40中的订单。一旦完成,便由移动驱动单元20将订单保持器40运送到库存站56和/或装运站58用于准备和/或装运到终端用户和/或装运目的地。In step 628 , the inventory items 42 stored by the inventory holder 30 and shipped to the inventory station 56 may be received by the appropriate container 60 of the order holder 40 . After container 60 receives requested inventory item 42 from inventory holder 30 , management module 15 determines whether the order is complete at step 630 . If there are outstanding orders, the method 600 may return to step 610 where the management module 15 determines whether to fill additional lines of orders in the inventory racks 50 and/or order holders 40 at the inventory stations 56 . If an additional line is determined to fill an order at inventory station 56 , order holders 40 may remain at inventory station 56 and additional inventory holders 30 containing additional requested inventory items 42 may be shipped to inventory station 56 . If an additional line is determined to fill the order at inventory holder 50 , the method may continue to step 614 where order holder 40 may be shipped to inventory holder 50 . Method 600 continues until the order in order holder 40 is completed at step 620 or 630 . Once complete, order holder 40 is transported by mobile drive unit 20 to inventory station 56 and/or shipping station 58 for preparation and/or shipment to an end user and/or shipping destination.

图7是图示促进在库存支架处履行订单的实例方法700的流程图。方法700开始于步骤702,其中开始选择要安放在库存支架50处的库存保持器30。方法700是图6中的方法600的步骤602的实例实施方式。FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example method 700 of facilitating fulfillment of an order at an inventory holder. Method 700 begins at step 702 where selection of an inventory holder 30 to be placed at an inventory holder 50 is initiated. Method 700 is an example implementation of step 602 of method 600 in FIG. 6 .

可基于速度和/或订单线完成进行选择库存30的方法。如果单独基于步骤704处的速度选择库存保持器30,那么所述方法进行到步骤706,其中在步骤706处计算库存系统10中的可用库存物品42的速度和/或体积。可以包括历史下单趋势和/或当前优秀订单和/或预测将在库存系统10内发生的期望订单的任何适当度量计算可用库存物品42的速度。如上文所讨论,速度可表示在其下订单包括每个库存物品且/或可包括在其下下单库存物品42的体积的相对速率。体积可指特定订单下单的库存物品42的量,且额外或是替代地可表示根据库存物品42的实际大小的物理体积。因此,管理模块15可基于这些库存物品42占用的实际空间量确定将库存物品42定位在库存支架50处。例如,可选择大型和/或块体物品用于放置在库存支架50处。在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可计算库存系统10内由特定SKU和/或唯一库存物品42生成的总系统活动。可基于最小化总系统活动而选择库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。The method of selecting inventory 30 may be based on speed and/or order line fulfillment. If an inventory holder 30 is selected based solely on the velocity at step 704 , the method proceeds to step 706 where the velocity and/or volume of available inventory items 42 in the inventory system 10 is calculated. The rate at which inventory items 42 are available may be calculated by any suitable metric including historical ordering trends and/or current outstanding orders and/or expected orders that are forecast to occur within inventory system 10 . As discussed above, velocity may represent a relative rate at which the order includes each inventory item and/or may include the volume under which the ordered inventory item 42 is placed. Volume may refer to the amount of inventory item 42 ordered for a particular order, and may additionally or alternatively represent a physical volume based on the actual size of inventory item 42 . Accordingly, management module 15 may determine to locate inventory items 42 at inventory holders 50 based on the actual amount of space these inventory items 42 occupy. For example, large and/or bulky items may be selected for placement at inventory holder 50 . In some embodiments, management module 15 may calculate the total system activity within inventory system 10 generated by a particular SKU and/or unique inventory item 42 . The inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 34 may be selected based on minimizing overall system activity.

在步骤708,选择存储具有最高速度的库存物品42的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器42安放在库存支架50处。在实例实施方案中,库存支架50可具有沿库存支架50位于十个库存保持器30(各位于十个限定区域中的一个)中的最多五十个库存物品42,其中每个库存保持器30存储最多五十个库存物品42中的五个。如果限定区域80中的一个因为例如库存保持器30中的一个的库存物品42即将用尽而变得可用且/或限定区域80中的一个仍未被填充,那么管理模块15然后可选择平均存储最高速度库存物品42中的五个的另一库存保持器30来定位在该限定区域80处。应注意,虽然举例提供特定量,但是库存保持器30和/货板保持器34的任何适当量和/或组合可定位在库存支架50处,且这些库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34可存储各个速度的库存物品42的任何适当量和/或组合。At step 708 , the inventory holder 30 and/or the pallet holder 42 storing the inventory item 42 having the highest velocity is selected for placement at the inventory holder 50 . In an example embodiment, the inventory holder 50 may have up to fifty inventory items 42 located along the inventory holder 50 in ten inventory holders 30 (each located in one of ten defined areas), where each inventory holder 30 Five of up to fifty inventory items 42 are stored. If one of the defined areas 80 becomes available because, for example, one of the stock holders 30 is about to run out of inventory items 42 and/or one of the defined areas 80 has not yet been filled, the management module 15 may then select an average storage Another inventory holder 30 for five of the highest velocity inventory items 42 is positioned at this defined area 80 . It should be noted that while specific quantities are provided by way of example, any suitable quantity and/or combination of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may be positioned at inventory holders 50 and that these inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 may store any suitable amount and/or combination of inventory items 42 at various speeds.

如果在步骤704,库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34并不是单独基于速度而是还基于期望的订单线完成,那么在步骤710,所述方法继续到步骤712,其中计算每个库存保持器30满足的优秀线订单。例如,管理模块15可确定库存系统10内由每个库存保持器30存储的每个库存物品42。如果所述特定库存保持器安放在库存支架50处,那么管理模块15可确定将满足的订单线量。基于满足的优秀线订单的总量,每个库存保持器可指派一个得分。步骤710可额外或是替代地将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的选择基于库存系统10中的优秀订单期望的总订单完成。例如,可对包括完成比另一库存保持器30更多的实际订单的一个或多个库存物品42的组合的库存保持器30给定偏好重量。If at step 704, the inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 is not based on velocity alone but is also based on the expected order line, then at step 710 the method proceeds to step 712 where each inventory holder is calculated Excellent line order fulfilled by retainer 30. For example, management module 15 may determine each inventory item 42 stored by each inventory holder 30 within inventory system 10 . Management module 15 may determine the quantity of an order line that would be filled if that particular inventory holder was placed at inventory holder 50 . Each keeper may be assigned a score based on the total amount of excellent line orders fulfilled. Step 710 may additionally or alternatively base the selection of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 on total order fulfillment based on outstanding order expectations in inventory system 10 . For example, a preference weight may be given to an inventory holder 30 that includes a combination of one or more inventory items 42 that fulfill more actual orders than another inventory holder 30 .

在步骤714,管理模块15可确定每个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34满足的期望量的订单线。例如,如果库存系统10期望接收大量订单的特定库存物品42,那么可在计分每个库存保持器30时将其考虑在内。基于步骤712和714中确定的总量,可在步骤716计算每个库存保持器30满足的订单线总量,且/或聚集指派给每个库存保持器30的得分。步骤714可额外或是替代地将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的选择基于库存系统10中的期望订单期望的总订单完成。例如,可对包括期望预测未来将比另一库存保持器30完成更多的实际订单的一个或多个库存物品42的组合的库存保持器30给定偏好重量。At step 714 , the management module 15 may determine a desired quantity of order lines that each inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 fulfills. For example, if inventory system 10 expects to receive a large order for a particular inventory item 42 , this may be taken into account when scoring each inventory holder 30 . Based on the totals determined in steps 712 and 714 , an order line total filled by each stock holder 30 may be calculated at step 716 and/or a score assigned to each stock holder 30 may be aggregated. Step 714 may additionally or alternatively base the selection of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 on the desired total order fulfillment of the desired order in inventory system 10 . For example, a preference weight may be given to an inventory holder 30 that includes a combination of one or more inventory items 42 that are expected to be predicted to fulfill more actual orders in the future than another inventory holder 30 .

基于每个库存保持器的总量,可在步骤718处确定具有最高总量的线订单完成和/或最佳得分的库存保持器30或货板保持器34。如果两个最高库存保持器相符,那么步骤720的所述方法可进行到步骤706,其中计算每个库存保持器30中的可用库存物品42的相对速度且可在步骤708选择具有最高速度库存物品42的一个库存保持器30或货板保持器34。如果不相符,那么所述方法可进行到步骤722且可选择具有最高总订单完成和/或最佳得分的库存保持器。步骤718可额外或是替代地将库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34的选择基于期望完成的优秀订单和期望完成的预测订单的总量。此外,还应注意,上文将方法700讨论为选择单个库存保持器30放置在单个库存支架50处,但是类似方法可用于选择多个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34在一个或多个库存支架50处的大体上所有或大部分限定区域80处。例如,方法700可用来选择对应于库存支架50处的三十个限定区域80的最多三十个库存保持器30。Based on each stock holder's total, the stock holder 30 or pallet holder 34 with the highest total line order fulfillment and/or best score may be determined at step 718 . If the two highest inventory holders match, the method at step 720 may proceed to step 706 where the relative velocity of the available inventory items 42 in each inventory holder 30 is calculated and the inventory item with the highest velocity may be selected at step 708 42 of an inventory holder 30 or pallet holder 34. If not, the method may proceed to step 722 and the stock holder with the highest total order fulfillment and/or best score may be selected. Step 718 may additionally or alternatively base the selection of inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 on the total amount of outstanding orders expected to be fulfilled and forecast orders expected to be fulfilled. Additionally, it should also be noted that method 700 is discussed above as selecting a single inventory holder 30 for placement at a single inventory holder 50, but a similar method could be used to select multiple inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 at one or Substantially all or most of the plurality of inventory holders 50 define the area 80 . For example, method 700 may be used to select up to thirty inventory holders 30 corresponding to thirty defined areas 80 at inventory holders 50 .

图8是图示促进在库存支架处履行订单的实例方法800的流程图。方法800开始于步骤802,其中开始选择布置订单保持器40。方法800是方法600的步骤612的实例实施方式。8 is a flowchart illustrating an example method 800 of facilitating fulfillment of an order at an inventory holder. Method 800 begins at step 802, where the selection of placement order holders 40 is initiated. Method 800 is an example implementation of step 612 of method 600 .

在步骤802,管理模块15开始布置订单保持器40。例如,管理模块15可开始布置唯库存支架订单保持器40、混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存站订单保持器40。在步骤806,管理模块15可将第一个订单选择为包括在订单保持器40中。例如,可检验库存物品42的优秀订单以确定每个订单有多少个线请求位于库存支架50处的库存物品42且/或由多少个线请求位于库存存储48中的库存物品42。可额外或是替代地检验优秀订单以确定每个订单上有多少总库存物品42位于库存支架50处且/或每个订单上有多少总库存物品42位于库存存储48中。基于每个订单上的总库存物品42和/或总线位于库存支架50处,每个订单可指派一个得分。基于要布置的订单保持器40的类型和每个订单的得分,管理模块15可选择适当第一订单来开始布置订单保持器40。例如,对于唯库存订单保持器40,管理模块15可选择位于库存支架50处的具有最佳得分的第一订单、最多线的库存物品42和/或最多总库存物品42。如果布置唯库存站订单保持器40,那么管理模块15可选择请求位于库存存储48处的库存物品42的适当订单。如果开始布置混合式订单保持器40,那么管理模块15可选择请求位于库存支架50处和/或位于库存存储48中的库存物品42的适当订单。应注意,订单可包括位于库存支架50的多个库存物品42,这尤其是因为如上文所阐述,管理模块15可选择计算来满足最多订单的库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34。因此,可能给定订单具有已位于库存支架50处的其全部库存物品42。At step 802 , the management module 15 begins to place the order holder 40 . For example, management module 15 may initiate placement of rack-only order holders 40 , hybrid order holders 40 , and/or station-only order holders 40 . At step 806 , the management module 15 may select the first order for inclusion in the order holder 40 . For example, outstanding orders for inventory items 42 may be examined to determine how many lines request inventory items 42 located at inventory holders 50 and/or how many lines request inventory items 42 located in inventory storage 48 per order. Outstanding orders may additionally or alternatively be examined to determine how many total inventory items 42 are located at inventory holder 50 on each order and/or how many total inventory items 42 are located in inventory storage 48 on each order. Each order may be assigned a score based on the total inventory items 42 on each order and/or the bus is located at the inventory holder 50 . Based on the type of order holders 40 to be placed and the score for each order, the management module 15 may select an appropriate first order to start placing the order holders 40 . For example, for an inventory-only order holder 40 , the management module 15 may select the first order with the best score, the most line of inventory items 42 , and/or the most total inventory items 42 located at the inventory holder 50 . If an inventory-only order holder 40 is deployed, management module 15 may optionally request an appropriate order for inventory items 42 located at inventory storage 48 . If deployment of hybrid order holders 40 begins, management module 15 may optionally request appropriate orders for inventory items 42 located at inventory holders 50 and/or located in inventory storage 48 . It should be noted that an order may include multiple inventory items 42 located at inventory holder 50 , especially because, as explained above, management module 15 may select the inventory holder 30 and/or pallet holder 34 calculated to fulfill the most orders. Thus, it is possible that a given order has all of its inventory items 42 already located at the inventory holder 50 .

在步骤808,与每个所选的订单相关联的容器60可布置在订单保持器40上。管理模块可例如将关于将哪个容器60增加到订单保持器40和/或如何将给定订单与特定容器60相关联的指令提供给引导站54的操作器。管理模块15可额外或是替代地指示操作器将容器60放置在订单保持器40上的何处。例如,特定订单保持器40可具有针对一个架上的特定大小和/或类型的容器60的空间,且可具有可用于不同量的不同类型容器60的空间。当布置订单保持器40上的订单时,管理模块15可考虑各个容器60的大小和/或类型。如果订单保持器40已使其中的容器60与其它订单相关联,那么管理模块15可确定如何相对于这些容器60放置其它容器60。此外或是替代地,管理模块15可在确定是否在步骤806和/或步骤812处将订单布置在订单保持器40上时考虑选定用于订单的容器60所占用的空间。At step 808 , the container 60 associated with each selected order may be placed on the order holder 40 . The management module may, for example, provide instructions to the operator of the guidance station 54 as to which containers 60 to add to the order holder 40 and/or how to associate a given order with a particular container 60 . The management module 15 may additionally or alternatively instruct the operator where to place the container 60 on the order holder 40 . For example, a particular order holder 40 may have space for a particular size and/or type of container 60 on one shelf, and may have space available for different quantities of different types of containers 60 . The management module 15 may take into account the size and/or type of each container 60 when placing the order on the order holder 40 . If the order holder 40 has associated containers 60 therein with other orders, the management module 15 may determine how to place the other containers 60 relative to those containers 60 . Additionally or alternatively, the management module 15 may consider the space occupied by the container 60 selected for the order when determining whether to place the order on the order holder 40 at step 806 and/or step 812 .

在步骤810,管理模块15可确定是否有额外空间可用于订单保持器40中的额外订单容器60。如果存在额外可用空间,那么在步骤812,管理模块812可确定一个或多个其它订单包括在订单保持器40中。例如,管理模块15可为库存支架50处的库存物品42增加订单且/或可为在库存系统10内的其它位置处的库存物品42增加订单。At step 810 , management module 15 may determine whether additional space is available for additional order containers 60 in order holder 40 . If there is additional space available, then at step 812 the management module 812 can determine that one or more other orders are included in the order holder 40 . For example, management module 15 may add orders for inventory items 42 at inventory holders 50 and/or may add orders for inventory items 42 at other locations within inventory system 10 .

在步骤812,管理模块15可额外或是替代地确定还在库存支架50处包括库存物品的其它订单。基于包括也位于库存支架50处的库存物品42的订单,管理模块15可选择布置在订单保持器40上的订单。例如,管理模块15可选择两个或多个订单以分组到订单保持器40中。两个或多个订单可包括步骤806处选择的第一订单和一个或多个其它订单。可基于所选第一订单请求的库存物品42选择除了第一订单之外的订单。例如,订单可基于具有与第一所选订单相同和/或类似的库存物品42被分组到订单保持器40。选择用于布置在订单保持器40上的订单可例如基于移动驱动单元20计算来行进到库存系统10中的库存支架50和/或其它位置而计算的行程量。如果未分组成计算的通过选择两个或多个订单而产生的行程量,那么管理模块15可通过比较以其它方式履行订单所需的行程量来确定计算的保值。管理模块15可选择减少和/或最小化总体行程的量的订单来分组。管理模块15还可选择减少和/或最小化由管理模块15生成的总体任务指派的量的订单来分组。例如,管理模块15可确定减少指派给移动驱动单元20填充订单的任务的量。At step 812 , management module 15 may additionally or alternatively determine other orders that also include inventory items at inventory holder 50 . Based on orders that include inventory items 42 that are also located at inventory holders 50 , management module 15 may select orders for placement on order holders 40 . For example, management module 15 may select two or more orders to group into order holder 40 . The two or more orders may include the first order selected at step 806 and one or more other orders. Orders other than the first order may be selected based on the inventory items 42 requested by the selected first order. For example, orders may be grouped into order holders 40 based on having the same and/or similar inventory items 42 as the first selected order. Orders selected for placement on order holder 40 may be based, for example, on the amount of travel calculated by mobile drive unit 20 to travel to inventory holder 50 and/or other locations in inventory system 10 . If not grouped into calculated travel volumes resulting from selecting two or more orders, management module 15 may determine the calculated hedge by comparing the travel volumes required to fulfill the orders in other ways. The management module 15 may select orders to group that reduce and/or minimize the amount of the overall trip. Management module 15 may also select to group orders that reduce and/or minimize the amount of overall task assignments generated by management module 15 . For example, management module 15 may determine to reduce the amount of tasks assigned to mobile drive unit 20 to fill the order.

如上文所讨论,管理模块15可基于确定订单只包括位于安放在库存支架50处的一个或多个库存保持器30和/或货板保持器34中的库存物品而从可用订单选择两个或多个订单。例如,管理模块15可确定布置唯库存支架订单保持器40、混合式订单保持器40和/或唯库存站订单保持器40。出于各种原因,管理模块15可确定将包括位于库存系统10内的其它位置(诸如库存存储48)的库存物品42的订单增加到订单保持器40以组建混合式订单保持器40。这个确定可基于上文所讨论的任何因素进行。所述确定可基于库存支架50处的工作量。As discussed above, management module 15 may select two or more from available orders based on determining that the order only includes inventory items located in one or more inventory holders 30 and/or pallet holders 34 housed at inventory holders 50. multiple orders. For example, management module 15 may determine to place inventory-only rack order holders 40 , hybrid order holders 40 , and/or inventory-only order holders 40 . For various reasons, management module 15 may determine to add to order holder 40 an order including inventory items 42 located elsewhere within inventory system 10 , such as inventory storage 48 , to form hybrid order holder 40 . This determination can be made based on any of the factors discussed above. The determination may be based on the workload at inventory holder 50 .

如上所述,当确定给定订单保持器40上的订单的布置时,管理模块15还可考虑库存物品42在库存支架50上的位置。例如,管理模块15可确定选择请求位于库存支架50处的不同库存保持器30中的库存物品42的订单。具体而言,管理模块15可基于确定第一订单用于由位于库存支架50的一个限定区域80处的库存保持器30存储的一个库存物品42,且确定第二订单用于由位于库存支架50处的另一限定区域80的另一库存保持器30存储的另一库存物品42而确定分组订单。As noted above, management module 15 may also consider the location of inventory items 42 on inventory holders 50 when determining the placement of orders on a given order holder 40 . For example, management module 15 may determine to select an order requesting inventory items 42 in different inventory holders 30 located at inventory holders 50 . Specifically, management module 15 may be based on determining a first order for an inventory item 42 stored by an inventory holder 30 located at a defined area 80 of inventory holder 50 and determining a second order for an inventory item 42 stored by inventory holder 50 located at a defined area 80 of inventory holder 50. A group order is determined for another inventory item 42 stored in another inventory holder 30 in another defined area 80 at the location.

一旦在步骤810处订单保持器40充满且/或不具有可用的额外空间,那么所述方法结束。应注意,虽然方法800图示为一次增加一个订单到订单保持器40,但是管理模块15可预先确定将被增加到特定订单保持器40的所有订单和/或容器60。Once the order holder 40 is full and/or has no additional space available at step 810, the method ends. It should be noted that while method 800 is illustrated as adding orders to order holder 40 one at a time, management module 15 may predetermine all orders and/or containers 60 to be added to a particular order holder 40 .

可对在图6-8的流程图中分别图示的方法600、700和800作出修改、增加或省略。例如,管理模块15能够一次和/或并行地指派多个任务。因此,管理模块15还可并行地和/或按顺序处理许多订单。此外,管理模块15可能够使用库存支架50来履行任何数量和类型的库存设施的订单。管理模块15可能够参考图4根据上文所讨论的原理用多个库存支架50履行订单。可由管理模块15使用各种库存站56和/或库存支架50循序地和/或同时处理与各种那些设施对应的订单。此外,可并行或以任何适当的顺序来执行图6-8的步骤。此外,参考本公开描述的实施方案被预期来完全组合在并适用于本文描述的适当的实施方案。Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to the methods 600, 700, and 800 illustrated in the flowcharts of FIGS. 6-8, respectively. For example, management module 15 can assign multiple tasks at once and/or in parallel. Thus, the management module 15 can also process many orders in parallel and/or sequentially. Additionally, management module 15 may be capable of using inventory holder 50 to fulfill orders for any number and type of inventory facility. Management module 15 may be capable of fulfilling orders with multiple inventory holders 50 according to the principles discussed above with reference to FIG. 4 . Orders corresponding to various of those facilities may be processed sequentially and/or simultaneously by management module 15 using various inventory stations 56 and/or inventory holders 50 . Furthermore, the steps of FIGS. 6-8 may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. Furthermore, embodiments described with reference to this disclosure are contemplated to be fully incorporated and applicable to appropriate embodiments described herein.

图9图示可用于本文所公开的系统和方法的一个或多个部分的实例计算机系统900。在特定实施方案中,一个或多个计算机系统900执行本文描述或图示的一种或多种方法的一个或多个步骤。在特定实施方案中,一个或多个计算机系统900提供本文中描述或图示的功能,诸如例如,系统10的任何适当的组件(诸如管理模块15、移动驱动单元20和/或库存支架50)。在特定实施方案中,运行在一个或多个计算机系统900上的软件执行本文描述或图示的一种或多种方法中的一个或多个步骤,或提供本文描述或图示的功能。特定实施方案包括一个或多个计算机系统900中的一个或多个部分。FIG. 9 illustrates an example computer system 900 that may be used with one or more portions of the systems and methods disclosed herein. In particular embodiments, one or more computer systems 900 perform one or more steps of one or more methods described or illustrated herein. In particular embodiments, one or more computer systems 900 provide the functionality described or illustrated herein, such as, for example, any suitable components of system 10 (such as management module 15, mobile drive unit 20, and/or inventory holder 50) . In particular embodiments, software running on one or more computer systems 900 performs one or more steps of one or more methods described or illustrated herein, or provides functionality described or illustrated herein. Particular embodiments include one or more portions of one or more computer systems 900 .

本公开预期任何适当数量的计算机系统900。本公开预期呈任何适当的物理形式存在的计算机系统900。作为实例而非限制,计算机系统900可以是嵌入式计算机系统、片上系统(SOC)、单板计算机系统(SBC)(诸如例如,计算机模块(COM)或系统模块(SOM))、台式计算机系统、膝上型或笔记本计算机系统、交互式信息亭、主机、计算机系统网、移动电话、个人数字助理(PDA)、服务器、平板计算机系统或这些设备中的两个或多个的组合。计算机系统900可适当包括一个或多个计算机系统900;是单一的或分布式的;跨越多个位置;跨越多个机器;跨越多个数据中心;或驻留在云中,其可包括一个或多个网络中的一个或多个云组件。一个或多个计算机系统900可适当执行(没有实质上的空间或时间限制)本文中描述或图示的一种或多种方法中的一个或多个步骤。作为实例而非限制,一个或多个计算机系统900可实时或以批量处理模式来执行本文中描述或图示的一种或多种方法中的一个或多个步骤。一个或多个计算机系统900可适当在不同时间或在不同位置处执行本文描述或图示的一个或多个方法中的一个或多个步骤。This disclosure contemplates any suitable number of computer systems 900 . This disclosure contemplates computer system 900 in any suitable physical form. By way of example and not limitation, computer system 900 may be an embedded computer system, a system on a chip (SOC), a single board computer system (SBC) such as, for example, a computer on module (COM) or a system on module (SOM)), a desktop computer system, Laptop or notebook computer systems, interactive kiosks, mainframes, networks of computer systems, mobile phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), servers, tablet computer systems, or a combination of two or more of these devices. The computer system 900 may suitably comprise one or more computer systems 900; be singular or distributed; span multiple locations; span multiple machines; span multiple data centers; or reside in the cloud, which may comprise one or One or more cloud components in multiple networks. One or more computer systems 900 may suitably perform (without substantial spatial or temporal limitation) one or more steps of one or more methods described or illustrated herein. By way of example and not limitation, one or more computer systems 900 may perform one or more steps of one or more methods described or illustrated herein in real-time or in batch processing mode. One or more computer systems 900 may perform at different times or at different locations, as appropriate, one or more steps of one or more methods described or illustrated herein.

在特定实施方案中,计算机系统900包括处理器902、内存904、存储器906、输入/输出(I/O)接口908、通信接口910和总线912。虽然本公开描述并图示具有在特定布置中的特定数量的特定组件的特定计算机系统,但是本公开预期任何适当的计算机系统,其具有在任何适当布置中的任何适当数量的任何适当组件。In a particular embodiment, computer system 900 includes processor 902 , memory 904 , storage 906 , input/output (I/O) interface 908 , communication interface 910 , and bus 912 . Although this disclosure describes and illustrates a particular computer system having a particular number of particular components in a particular arrangement, this disclosure contemplates any suitable computer system having any suitable number of any suitable components in any suitable arrangement.

在特定实施方案中,处理器902包括用于执行指令(诸如组成计算机程序的那些指令)的硬件。作为实例而非限制,为了执行指令,处理器902可从内部寄存器、内部缓存、内存904或存储器906检索(或提取)指令;并解码并执行所述指令;且然后将一个或多个结果写入内部寄存器、内部缓存、内存904或存储器906中。在特定实施方案中,处理器902可包括一个或多个用于数据、指令或地址的内部缓存。虽然本公开描述并图示了特定的处理器,但是本公开预期任何适当的处理器。In particular embodiments, processor 902 includes hardware for executing instructions, such as those making up a computer program. By way of example and not limitation, to execute instructions, processor 902 may retrieve (or fetch) instructions from internal registers, internal cache, memory 904, or storage 906; decode and execute the instructions; and then write one or more results to into internal registers, internal cache, internal memory 904, or storage 906. In particular embodiments, processor 902 may include one or more internal caches for data, instructions, or addresses. Although this disclosure describes and illustrates a particular processor, this disclosure contemplates any suitable processor.

在特定实施方案中,内存904包括主内存,其用于存储处理器902执行的指令或处理器902操作的数据。在某些实施方案中,内存904可以是包括在上文讨论的任何系统10组件中的内存,诸如管理模块15、移动驱动单元20和/或库存支架50。内存904可存储用于系统10的组件的任何适当的信息,诸如与管理模块15接收的多个订单相关联的多个订单和/或信息。作为实例而非限制,计算机系统900可将来自存储器906或另一来源(诸如例如,另一计算机系统900)的指令加载到内存904。处理器902可然后将来自内存904的指令加载到内部寄存器或内部缓存。例如,处理902可获得与存储在内存904中的多个订单相关联的信息。为了执行所述指令,处理器902可从内部寄存器或内部缓存检索指令,并解码所述指令。在执行指令期间或之后,处理器902可将一个或多个结果(其可以是中间结果或最终结果)写入内部寄存器或内部缓存。处理器902可然后将那些结果中的一个或多个写入内存904。在特定实施方案中,处理器902只执行一个或多个内部寄存器或内部缓存中或内存904中(而不是存储器906或其它地方)的指令,并且只操作一个或多个内部寄存器或内部缓存或内存904中(而不是存储器906或其它地方)的数据。一个或多个内存总线(其可各自包括地址总线和数据总线)可将处理器02耦合到内存904。总线912可包括一个或多个内存总线,如下文所述。在特定实施方案中,一个或多个内存管理单元(MMU)驻留在处理器902与内存904之间,并促进对处理器902所请求的内存904的访问。虽然本公开描述并图示特定内存,但是本公开预期任何适当的内存。In particular embodiments, memory 904 includes main memory for storing instructions for execution by processor 902 or data for manipulation by processor 902 . In some embodiments, memory 904 may be memory included in any of the system 10 components discussed above, such as management module 15 , mobile drive unit 20 , and/or inventory holder 50 . Memory 904 may store any suitable information for components of system 10 , such as a number of orders and/or information associated with a number of orders received by management module 15 . By way of example and not limitation, computer system 900 may load instructions into memory 904 from memory 906 or from another source, such as, for example, another computer system 900 . Processor 902 may then load the instructions from memory 904 into internal registers or internal cache. For example, process 902 may obtain information associated with a plurality of orders stored in memory 904 . To execute the instructions, processor 902 may retrieve the instructions from an internal register or internal cache and decode the instructions. During or after execution of the instructions, processor 902 may write one or more results (which may be intermediate or final results) to an internal register or internal cache. Processor 902 may then write one or more of those results to memory 904 . In particular embodiments, processor 902 executes only instructions in one or more internal registers or internal caches or in memory 904 (rather than memory 906 or elsewhere), and operates only on one or more internal registers or internal caches or Data in memory 904 (rather than storage 906 or elsewhere). One or more memory buses (which may each include an address bus and a data bus) may couple processor 02 to memory 904 . Bus 912 may include one or more memory buses, as described below. In particular embodiments, one or more memory management units (MMUs) reside between processor 902 and memory 904 and facilitate access to memory 904 as requested by processor 902 . Although this disclosure describes and illustrates particular memory, this disclosure contemplates any suitable memory.

在特定实施方案中,存储器906包括用于数据或指令的大容量存储器。在某些实施方案中,可在系统10的任何适当的组件(包括管理模块15、移动驱动单元20和/或库存支架50)中包括存储器906。存储器906可存储用于系统10的组件的任何适当的信息,诸如与管理模块15接收的多个订单相关联的多个订单和/或信息。存储器906可适当包括可移动或不可移动(例如,固定的)介质。存储器906适当可以在计算机系统900的内部或外部。在特定实施方案中,存储器906是非易失性的固态内存。存储器906可适当包括一个或多个存储器706。虽然本公开描述并图示特定存储器,但是本公开预期任何适当的存储器。In particular embodiments, memory 906 includes mass storage for data or instructions. In certain embodiments, memory 906 may be included in any suitable component of system 10 , including management module 15 , mobile drive unit 20 , and/or inventory holder 50 . Memory 906 may store any suitable information for components of system 10 , such as a number of orders and/or information associated with a number of orders received by management module 15 . Storage 906 may comprise removable or non-removable (eg, fixed) media, as appropriate. Memory 906 may be internal or external to computer system 900 as appropriate. In a particular embodiment, memory 906 is non-volatile solid-state memory. Memory 906 may include one or more memories 706 as appropriate. Although this disclosure describes and illustrates particular memory, this disclosure contemplates any suitable memory.

在特定实施方案中,I/O接口908包括硬件、软件或二者,其提供用于在计算机系统900与一个或多个I/O装置之间的通信的一个或多个接口。计算机系统900可适当包括这些I/O装置中的一个或多个。这些I/O装置中的一个或多个可实现人与计算机系统900之间的通信。作为实例而非限制,I/O装置可包括键盘、按键、麦克风、监测器、鼠标、打印机、扫描仪、扬声器、静物照相机、光笔、输入板、触摸屏、跟踪球、视频照相机、另一适当的I/O装置,或这些装置中的两个或更多个的组合。I/O装置可包括一个或多个感测器。本公开预期任何适当的I/O装置和用于所述装置的任何适当的I/O接口908。I/O接口908可适当包括一个或多个装置或软件驱动器,其使处理器902能够驱动这些I/O装置中的一个或多个。I/O接口908可适当包括一个或多个I/O接口908。虽然本公开描述并图示了特定的I/O接口,但是本公开预期任何适当的I/O接口。In particular embodiments, I/O interface 908 includes hardware, software, or both, that provides one or more interfaces for communication between computer system 900 and one or more I/O devices. Computer system 900 may include one or more of these I/O devices as appropriate. One or more of these I/O devices may enable communication between a person and computer system 900 . By way of example and not limitation, an I/O device may include a keyboard, keypad, microphone, monitor, mouse, printer, scanner, speaker, still camera, light pen, tablet, touch screen, trackball, video camera, another suitable I/O devices, or a combination of two or more of these devices. An I/O device may include one or more sensors. This disclosure contemplates any suitable I/O device and any suitable I/O interface 908 for such a device. I/O interface 908 may suitably include one or more device or software drivers that enable processor 902 to drive one or more of these I/O devices. I/O interfaces 908 may include one or more I/O interfaces 908 as appropriate. Although this disclosure describes and illustrates particular I/O interfaces, this disclosure contemplates any suitable I/O interfaces.

在特定实施方案中,通信接口910包括硬件、软件或二者,其提供用于计算机系统900与一个或多个其它计算机系统900或一个或多个网络之间的通信(诸如例如,基于分组的通信)。作为实例而非限制,通信接口910可包括:网络接口控制器(NIC)或网络适配器,其用于与以太网或其它基于有线的网络进行通信;或无线NIC(WNIC)或无线适配器,其用于与无线网络(诸如Wi-Fi网络)进行通信。本公开预期任何适当的网络和用于所述网络的任何适当的通信接口910。虽然本公开描述并图示特定的通信接口,但是本公开预期任何适当的通信接口。In particular embodiments, communication interface 910 includes hardware, software, or both, that provides for communication between computer system 900 and one or more other computer systems 900 or one or more networks (such as, for example, packet-based communications). By way of example and not limitation, communication interface 910 may include: a network interface controller (NIC) or network adapter for communicating with Ethernet or other wire-based networks; or a wireless NIC (WNIC) or wireless adapter for for communicating with wireless networks, such as Wi-Fi networks. This disclosure contemplates any suitable network and any suitable communication interface 910 for the network. Although this disclosure describes and illustrates a particular communication interface, this disclosure contemplates any suitable communication interface.

在特定实施方案中,总线912包括硬件、软件或二者,其将计算机系统900的组件彼此耦合。虽然本公开描述并图示特定的总线,但是本公开预期任何适当的总线或互连件。In particular embodiments, bus 912 includes hardware, software, or both, and couples the components of computer system 900 to each other. Although this disclosure describes and illustrates a particular bus, this disclosure contemplates any suitable bus or interconnect.

在本文中,参考计算机可读存储介质涵盖一个或多个非暂时性、有形的计算机可读存储介质处理结构。作为实例而非限制,计算机可读存储介质可适当包括基于半导体或其它集成电路(IC)(诸如例如,现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或专用IC(ASIC)、硬盘、HDD、混合硬驱动(HHD)、光盘、光盘驱动(ODD)、磁光盘、磁光驱动、软磁盘、软磁盘驱动(FDD)、磁带、全息存储介质、固态驱动(SSD)RAM驱动、安全数码卡、安全数码驱动、或另一适当的计算机可读存储介质,或这些装置中的两个或更多个的组合。计算机可读非暂时性存储介质适当可以是易失性的、非易失性的,或易失性和非易失性的组合。Herein, reference to a computer-readable storage medium encompasses one or more non-transitory, tangible computer-readable storage medium processing structures. By way of example and not limitation, computer-readable storage media may suitably include semiconductor-based or other integrated circuit (IC) (such as, for example, field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or application-specific IC (ASIC), hard disk, HDD, hybrid hard drive ( HHD), optical disk, optical disk drive (ODD), magneto-optical disk, magneto-optical drive, floppy disk, floppy disk drive (FDD), magnetic tape, holographic storage media, solid-state drive (SSD) RAM drive, secure digital card, secure digital drive, or another An appropriate computer-readable storage medium, or a combination of two or more of these devices. The computer-readable non-transitory storage medium can be volatile, non-volatile, or both volatile and non-volatile combination.

本公开预期有实施任何适当存储器器的一个或多个计算机迎可读存储介质。在特定实施方案中,计算机可读存储介质适当实施处理器902的一个或多个部分(诸如,例如,一个或多个内部寄存器或缓存)、内存904的一个或多个部分、存储器906的一个或多个部分、或这些的组合。在特定实施方案中,计算机可读存储介质实施RAM或ROM。在特定实施方案中,计算机可读存储介质实施易失性或永久内存。在特定实施方案中,一个或多个计算机可读存储介质包括软件。在本文中,参考软件可涵盖一个或多个应用程序、字节代码、一个或多个计算机程序、一个或多个可执行文件、一个或多个指令、逻辑、机器代码、一个或多个脚本或源代码,且在适当情况下反之亦然。在特定实施方案中,软件包括一个或多个应用程序编程接口(API)。本公开预期任何适当的软件,其以任何适当的编程语言或编程语言的组合来编写或另外表述。在特定实施方案中,软件被表述为源代码或目标代码。This disclosure contemplates one or more computer-readable storage media implementing any suitable memory. In particular embodiments, computer-readable storage media suitably implement one or more portions of processor 902 (such as, for example, one or more internal registers or caches), one or more portions of memory 904, one or more portions of memory 906, or multiple parts, or a combination of these. In particular embodiments, the computer readable storage medium implements RAM or ROM. In particular embodiments, a computer readable storage medium implements volatile or persistent memory. In certain embodiments, one or more computer-readable storage media include software. As used herein, reference to software may encompass one or more applications, byte code, one or more computer programs, one or more executable files, one or more instructions, logic, machine code, one or more scripts or source code, and vice versa where appropriate. In certain embodiments, software includes one or more application programming interfaces (APIs). This disclosure contemplates any suitable software written or otherwise expressed in any suitable programming language or combination of programming languages. In certain embodiments, software is expressed as source code or object code.

在本文中,“或”是包含性的而非排他性的,除非另有明确指示或由上下文另外指示。因此,在本文中,“A或B”意指“A、B或二者”,除非另有明确指示或由上下文另外指示。此外,“和”是二者连带和个别,除非另有明确指示或由上下文另外指示。因此,在本文中,“A和B”意指“A和B,连带地或个别地”,除非另有明确指示或由上下文另外指示。Herein, "or" is inclusive and not exclusive, unless expressly indicated otherwise or indicated otherwise by context. Thus, herein, "A or B" means "A, B, or both" unless expressly indicated otherwise or indicated otherwise by context. Furthermore, "and" is both several and several, unless expressly indicated otherwise or indicated otherwise by context. Thus, herein, "A and B" means "A and B, jointly or severally," unless expressly indicated otherwise or indicated otherwise by context.

本公开涵盖本领域的普通技术人员可理解的对本文中的实例实施方案的所有改变、取代、变体、取代和修改。类似地,随附权利要求书适当包括本领域的普通技术人员可理解的对本文中的实例实施方案的所有修改、取代、变体、更改和修改。此外,在随附权利要求书中参考被适配于、被布置来、能够、被配置来、被启动来、可操作来或操作来执行特定功能的设备或系统或设备或系统的组件涵盖所述设备、系统、组件,无论所述设备、系统、组件或所述特定功能是否被启动、打开或解锁,只要所述设备、系统或组件是如此适配、被布置、能够、被配置、被启动、可操作或操作。This disclosure encompasses all changes, substitutions, variations, substitutions, and modifications to the example embodiments herein that would occur to one of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, the appended claims suitably encompass all modifications, substitutions, variations, changes, and modifications to the example embodiments herein that would occur to those of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, reference in the appended claims to a device or system or a component of a device or system that is adapted, arranged, capable, configured, activated, operable or operative to perform a specified function encompasses all said device, system, component, regardless of whether said device, system, component or said specific function is activated, opened or unlocked, as long as said device, system or component is so adapted, arranged, able, configured, Initiate, be operable, or operate.

可使用一个或多个软件或软件模块单独或与其它装置组合来执行或实施本文中描述的任何步骤、操作或过程。在一个实施方案中,使用包括计算机可读介质的计算机程序产品来实施软件模块,所述计算机可读介质含有可由计算机处理器执行以用于执行所描述的任何或所有步骤、操作或过程的计算机程序代码。Any of the steps, operations or processes described herein may be performed or carried out using one or more software or software modules alone or in combination with other means. In one embodiment, a software module is implemented using a computer program product comprising a computer-readable medium containing a computer-readable medium executable by a computer processor for performing any or all of the steps, operations, or processes described. code.

本发明的实施方案还可涉及用于执行本文的操作的设备。该设备可以是特别构造用于所需目的,且/或其可包括通用计算装置,所述通用计算装置由存储在计算机中的计算机程序选择性地启动或重新配置。这种计算机程序可存储在用于存储电子指令的有形计算机可读存储介质或任何类型的介质中,并耦合到计算机系统总线。此外,在说明书中提及的任何计算系统可包括单个处理器或可以是采用被设计用于增加的计算能力的多个处理器的架构。Embodiments of the invention may also relate to apparatus for performing the operations herein. This apparatus may be specially constructed for the required purposes, and/or it may comprise a general purpose computing device selectively activated or reconfigured by a computer program stored in the computer. Such a computer program may be stored in a tangible computer readable storage medium or any type of medium for storing electronic instructions and coupled to a computer system bus. Furthermore, any computing system mentioned in the specification may include a single processor or may be an architecture employing multiple processors designed for increased computing power.

虽然图示了库存系统10的特定实施方案,但是应理解,本公开的教导可应用于任何类型和数量的库存系统。例如,库存系统10可表示商品退回设施。在这种实施方案中,库存物品可表示被客户退回的商品。当在设施处从个别客户接收时,这些商品可存储在库存保持器130中。在适当的时间,大量的单元可从特定的库存保持器30移除,并在库存支架50处运送库存保持器40。例如,特定库存物品可与产品召回相关联,造成这些库存物品以高体积返回。作为另一实例,系统10可表示生产设施,并且库存物品可表示生产套件的个别组件。因此,生产套件的个别物品可存储在库存保持器30中。用于生产产品的订单可从库存支架50处自个别物品中装配。最终产品可使用订单保持器由移动驱动单元20运送且可装运到适当目的地。因此,虽然在本公开中描述若干实例实施方案,但是库存系统10一般可表示存储或处理库存物品的任何适当设施或系统,且库存物品可表示适于在特定库存系统10中存储、检索和/或处理的任何类型的物体。While a particular embodiment of an inventory system 10 is illustrated, it should be understood that the teachings of the present disclosure are applicable to any type and number of inventory systems. For example, inventory system 10 may represent a merchandise returns facility. In such an embodiment, an inventory item may represent merchandise returned by a customer. These items may be stored in inventory holders 130 as they are received at the facility from individual customers. At the appropriate time, a number of units may be removed from a particular inventory holder 30 and the inventory holder 40 shipped at the inventory holder 50 . For example, certain inventory items may be associated with product recalls causing these inventory items to be returned in high volume. As another example, system 10 may represent a production facility, and inventory items may represent individual components of a production kit. Accordingly, individual items of a production kit may be stored in inventory holder 30 . Orders for production products can be assembled from individual items from the inventory holder 50 . The final product can be shipped by mobile drive unit 20 using the order holder and can be shipped to the appropriate destination. Thus, while several example embodiments are described in this disclosure, inventory system 10 may generally represent any suitable facility or system for storing or handling inventory items, and inventory items may represent devices suitable for storage, retrieval, and/or storage in a particular inventory system 10. or any type of object handled.

在一些实施方案中,管理模块15可独立于这些库存请求而生成任务指派作为库存系统10的总体管理和维护的部分。例如,管理模块15可响应于发生特定事件(例如,响应于移动驱动单元20请求停靠的空间)、根据预定调度(例如,作为例如日常开始程序的部分)或在任何适当时间基于库存系统10的构造和特征生成任务指派。此外,虽然管理模块15可被配置来管理库存系统10的组件的操作的各个方面,但是在特定实施方案中,组件本身也可负责其操作的特定方面的决策,从而减少管理模块15上的处理负载。特定而言,个别组件可被配置来以容许这些组件改善其效率的方式独立响应于特定本地化环境,而不会减少库存系统10的总体效率。作为实例,管理模块15可依赖于移动驱动单元20的独立决策以防止碰撞。此外,虽然以上描述关注其中移动驱动单元20请求自管理模块15的路径的一个或多个实施方案,但是在替代实施方案中,移动驱动单元20可生成其自身的路径。此外,虽然以上讨论描述沿库存支架50的一侧移动订单保持器40,但是本公开的教导还可应用于其中沿库存支架50的一侧定位运输设备配置。容器60可沿传输设备移动且停在各个位置处以与上文参考订单保持器40所述类似的方式接收库存物品42。此外,在一些实施方案中,移动驱动单元20可包括传输设备。In some embodiments, management module 15 may generate task assignments as part of the overall management and maintenance of inventory system 10 independently of these inventory requests. For example, management module 15 may respond to the occurrence of a particular event (e.g., in response to mobile drive unit 20 requesting space to dock), according to a predetermined schedule (e.g., as part of, e.g., a daily start-up procedure), or at any appropriate time based on inventory system 10's Construction and feature generation task assignment. Furthermore, while management module 15 may be configured to manage various aspects of the operation of components of inventory system 10, in certain embodiments, the components themselves may also be responsible for making decisions about certain aspects of their operation, thereby reducing processing on management module 15. load. In particular, individual components can be configured to independently respond to specific localized circumstances in a manner that allows these components to improve their efficiency without reducing the overall efficiency of inventory system 10 . As an example, management module 15 may rely on independent decisions of mobile drive units 20 to prevent collisions. Furthermore, while the above description focuses on one or more implementations in which mobile drive unit 20 requests a path from management module 15 , in alternative implementations mobile drive unit 20 may generate its own path. Additionally, while the above discussion describes moving order holders 40 along a side of inventory holder 50 , the teachings of the present disclosure are also applicable to configurations in which transport equipment is positioned along a side of inventory holder 50 . Containers 60 may be moved along the conveyor and stopped at various locations to receive inventory items 42 in a manner similar to that described above with reference to order holders 40 . Additionally, in some embodiments, mobile drive unit 20 may include a transport device.

可根据以下条款描述本公开的各个实施方案:Various embodiments of the disclosure may be described in terms of the following terms:

1.一种方法,其包括:由管理模块指定沿库存支架的第一侧安放在多个限定区域的多个库存保持器;由所述管理模块指示一个或多个第一移动驱动单元来运送所述多个库存保持器到所述多个限定区域,其中在履行多个订单时所述多个库存保持器在所述多个限定区域处保持固定;接收多个库存物品的订单;由所述管理模块确定由所述订单请求的库存物品存储在安放在所述库存支架处的限定区域处的库存保持器中,其中所述库存保持器是所述多个库存保持器中的一个;和由所述管理模块指示第二移动驱动单元运送订单保持器到所述库存支架的第二侧,其中所述第二移动驱动单元沿所述第二侧移动使得所述订单保持器可操作以在沿与所述库存保持器的限定区域相对的所述库存支架的所述第二侧的位置处接收所述库存物品。1. A method comprising: designating, by a management module, a plurality of inventory holders to be disposed in a plurality of defined areas along a first side of an inventory holder; instructing, by the management module, one or more first mobile drive units to deliver the plurality of inventory holders to the plurality of defined areas, wherein the plurality of inventory holders remain stationary at the plurality of defined areas while fulfilling a plurality of orders; receiving orders for a plurality of inventory items; by the the management module determines that an inventory item requested by the order is stored in an inventory holder disposed at a defined area at the inventory holder, wherein the inventory holder is one of the plurality of inventory holders; and instructing, by the management module, a second mobile drive unit to deliver an order holder to a second side of the inventory holder, wherein the second mobile drive unit moves along the second side such that the order holder is operable to The inventory item is received at a location along the second side of the inventory holder opposite the defined area of the inventory holder.

2.根据条款1所述的方法,其还包括:确定所述订单请求额外库存物品;指示所述第二移动驱动单元运送所述订单保持器到库存站;和指示所述第一移动驱动单元中的一个将存储所述额外库存物品的库存保持器从库存存储位置运送到所述库存站。2. The method of clause 1, further comprising: determining that the order requests additional inventory items; instructing the second mobile drive unit to ship the order holder to a stocking station; and instructing the first mobile drive unit One of transports an inventory holder storing the additional inventory item from an inventory storage location to the inventory station.

3.根据条款1所述的方法,其中所述库存支架是第一库存支架且所述方法还包括:确定所述订单请求额外库存物品;指示所述第二移动驱动单元运送所述订单保持器到第二库存支架;和在所述第二库存支架处用所述额外库存物品完成所述订单。3. The method of clause 1, wherein the inventory holder is a first inventory holder and the method further comprises: determining that the order requests additional inventory items; instructing the second mobile drive unit to ship the order holder to a second inventory holder; and fulfilling the order at the second inventory holder with the additional inventory item.

4.根据条款1所述的方法,其还包括:在所述库存支架处启动指示沿所述第二侧移动的订单保持器将停在与所述限定区域相对的所述位置处的信号;和至少部分基于所述信号指示所述库存支架的操作器移动到所述限定区域。4. The method of clause 1, further comprising: activating a signal at the inventory holder indicating that an order holder moving along the second side will stop at the location opposite the defined area; and instructing an operator of the inventory holder to move to the defined area based at least in part on the signal.

5.根据条款1所述的方法,其中所述限定区域包括第一限定区域,所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器,且所述方法还包括:至少部分基于第一触发事件,指示所述第一移动驱动单元中的一个从所述第一限定区域移除所述第一库存保持器且运送所述第一库存保持器到与所述库存支架相关联的漂移位置;指示第三移动驱动单元运送第二库存保持器到所述第一限定区域;和至少部分基于第二触发事件,指示所述第一移动驱动单元中的一个将所述第一库存保持器从所述漂移位置运送到所述库存支架处的第二限定区域。5. The method of clause 1, wherein the defined area comprises a first defined area, the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder, and the method further comprises: based at least in part on a first triggering event, indicating that the one of the first mobile drive units removes the first inventory holder from the first defined area and transports the first inventory holder to a drift position associated with the inventory holder; indicating a third movement a drive unit transporting a second inventory holder to said first defined area; and based at least in part on a second trigger event, instructing one of said first mobile drive units to transport said first inventory holder from said drift location to a second defined area at the stock holder.

6.根据条款1所述的方法,其还包括:确定在其下在库存系统内下单多个库存物品中每个的速率;比较所述多个库存物品中的每个的速率;至少部分基于所述比较,选择高于预定速率的库存物品的量;且其中指定所述多个库存保持器安放在所述多个限定区域是至少部分基于确定所述库存物品量存储在所述多个库存保持器中。6. The method of clause 1, further comprising: determining a rate at which each of a plurality of inventory items is ordered within the inventory system; comparing the rates of each of the plurality of inventory items; at least in part Based on the comparison, selecting an amount of inventory items above a predetermined rate; and wherein designating the plurality of inventory holders to be located in the plurality of defined areas is based at least in part on determining that the amount of inventory items is stored in the plurality of in the stock holder.

7.一种系统,其包括:7. A system comprising:

库存支架,其包括第一侧和第二侧,所述第一侧包括多个限定区域,在所述区域处多个库存保持器被指定用于安放,所述库存支架可操作以在所述多个限定区域中的至少一个处从所述库存保持器中的至少一个接收库存物品;和移动驱动单元,其可操作以沿所述库存支架的所述第二侧运送订单保持器,其中所述订单保持器可操作以在沿所述库存支架的所述第二侧的位置处从所述库存支架接收库存物品。an inventory holder including a first side and a second side, the first side including a plurality of defined areas where a plurality of inventory holders are designated for placement, the inventory holder operable to receiving inventory items from at least one of the inventory holders at at least one of a plurality of defined areas; and a mobile drive unit operable to transport order holders along the second side of the inventory holder, wherein the The order holder is operable to receive inventory items from the inventory holder at a location along the second side of the inventory holder.

8.根据条款7所述的系统,其中沿所述库存支架的第二侧的所述位置与所述第一侧上的限定区域相对,所述限定区域具有存储所述库存物品的库存保持器。8. The system of clause 7, wherein the location along the second side of the inventory holder is opposite a defined area on the first side having an inventory holder storing the inventory item .

9.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述移动驱动单元包括第一移动驱动单元且所述系统还包括第二移动驱动单元,其可操作以运送所述多个库存保持器中的一个或多个到所述库存支架处的限定区域中的一个或多个。9. The system of clause 7, wherein the mobile drive unit comprises a first mobile drive unit and the system further comprises a second mobile drive unit operable to transport one or One or more of a plurality of defined areas at the inventory holder.

10.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述多个库存保持器至少部分基于存储在所述多个库存保持器中的一个或多个库存物品的产品速度而指定用于所述限定区域。10. The system of clause 7, wherein the plurality of inventory holders are designated for the defined area based at least in part on a product velocity of one or more inventory items stored in the plurality of inventory holders.

11.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述多个库存保持器在填充多个订单时保持安放在限定区域处。11. The system of clause 7, wherein the plurality of stock holders remain seated at a defined area while filling a plurality of orders.

12.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述订单保持器可操作以保持多个容器,其中所述容器中的至少一部分与请求存储在所述多个库存保持器中的一个中的库存物品的一个或多个订单相关联。12. The system of clause 7, wherein the order holder is operable to hold a plurality of containers, wherein at least some of the containers are compatible with inventory items requested to be stored in one of the plurality of stock holders associated with one or more orders for .

13.根据条款7所述的系统,所述移动驱动单元还可操作以:在所述限定区域中的一个处以第二库存保持器取代所述多个库存保持器的第一库存保持器,其中至少部分基于与所述第一库存保持器相关联的度量取代所述第一库存保持器。13. The system of clause 7, the mobile drive unit further operable to: replace a first inventory holder of the plurality of inventory holders with a second inventory holder at one of the defined areas, wherein The first inventory holder is replaced based at least in part on metrics associated with the first inventory holder.

14.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述限定区域中的一个或多个指定用于存储垃圾保持器且所述移动驱动单元可操作以运送所述垃圾保持器。14. The system of clause 7, wherein one or more of the defined areas are designated for storing waste holders and the mobile drive unit is operable to transport the waste holders.

15.根据条款7所述的系统,其中所述第一移动驱动单元可操作以移动所述多个库存保持器中的一个到与所述库存支架相关联的漂移位置。15. The system of clause 7, wherein the first mobile drive unit is operable to move one of the plurality of inventory holders to a drift position associated with the inventory holder.

16.根据条款7所述的系统,所述库存支架还包括界面,所述界面可操作以指示所述库存支架的操作器从所述多个库存保持器中的一个移除所述库存物品且将所述库存物品放置在存储在所述订单保持器中的容器中,所述容器与所述订单相关联。16. The system of clause 7, the inventory holder further comprising an interface operable to instruct an operator of the inventory holder to remove the inventory item from one of the plurality of inventory holders and The inventory item is placed in a container stored in the order holder, the container being associated with the order.

17.根据条款7所述的系统,所述库存支架还包括第一操作器区和第二操作器区,其中所述第一操作器区指定应用于第一操作器以将库存物品放置到所述限定区域的第一子组处的所述订单保持器中,且所述第二操作器区指定用于第二操作器以将库存物品放置到所述限定区域的第二子组处的所述订单保持器中。17. The system of clause 7, the inventory holder further comprising a first operator zone and a second operator zone, wherein the first operator zone designations apply to the first operator to place the inventory item into the in said order holders at a first subset of said defined area, and said second operator zone is designated for a second operator to place inventory items into all said order holders at a second subset of said defined area in the order holder described above.

18.根据条款7所述的系统,所述库存支架还包括扁平表面、抬高表面和工作间的虚拟区域中的一个或多个。18. The system of clause 7, the inventory holder further comprising one or more of a flat surface, a raised surface, and a virtual area of the booth.

19.一种系统,其包括:库存保持器;订单保持器;和移动驱动单元,所述移动驱动单元可操作以:19. A system comprising: an inventory holder; an order holder; and a mobile drive unit operable to:

运送所述库存保持器到库存支架的第一侧的限定区域;运送所述订单保持器到所述库存支架;沿所述库存支架的第二侧移动所述订单保持器;和停在沿与所述限定区域相对的第二侧的位置处,其中所述订单保持器可操作以在所述限定区域处从所述库存保持器接收库存物品。transporting the inventory holder to a defined area of a first side of an inventory holder; delivering the order holder to the inventory holder; moving the order holder along a second side of the inventory holder; A location on a second side opposite the defined area, wherein the order holder is operable to receive inventory items from the stock holder at the defined area.

20.根据条款19所述的系统,其中所述库存保持器所述库存保持器是第一库存保持器且所述移动驱动单元还可操作以用第二库存保持器取代所述第一库存保持器,且所述系统还包括管理模块,所述管理模块至少部分基于比较与所述第一库存保持器相关联的第一度量和与所述第二库存保持器相关联的第二度量指示所述移动驱动单元用所述第二库存保持器取代所述第一库存保持器。20. The system of clause 19, wherein the inventory holder is a first inventory holder and the mobile drive unit is further operable to replace the first inventory holder with a second inventory holder and the system further includes a management module based at least in part on comparing a first metric associated with the first inventory keeper with a second metric associated with the second inventory keeper indicating The mobile drive unit replaces the first inventory holder with the second inventory holder.

21.根据条款20所述的系统,其中所述第一度量包括以下项中的一个或多个:存储在所述第一库存保持器中的库存物品的量;和存储在所述第一库存保持器中的库存物品的速度。21. The system of clause 20, wherein the first metric includes one or more of: the amount of inventory items stored in the first inventory holder; The velocity of inventory items in the inventory keeper.

22.根据条款20所述的系统,其中所述第一度量包括第一期望需求,所述第二度量包括第二期望需求,且管理模块还可操作以至少部分基于在特定时间确定预测所述第二期望需求超过所述第一期望需求而在所述特定时间调度所述第一库存保持器来由所述第二库存保持器取代。22. The system of clause 20, wherein the first metric comprises a first expected demand, the second metric comprises a second expected demand, and the management module is further operable to determine the predicted demand based at least in part at a particular time. The first inventory holder is scheduled to be replaced by the second inventory holder at the specified time if the second expected demand exceeds the first expected demand.

23.根据条款20所述的系统,其中所述移动驱动单元可操作以通过以下项运送所述库存保持器:在所述库存保持器下方移动;朝所述库存保持器的表面抬高对接头;使用所述对接头抬升所述库存保持器;在抬升所述库存保持器时移动。23. The system of clause 20, wherein the mobile drive unit is operable to transport the inventory holder by: moving under the inventory holder; raising a docking head toward a surface of the inventory holder ; raising the inventory holder using the docking head; moving while raising the inventory holder.

24.根据条款19所述的系统,其还包括管理模块,所述管理模块可操作以:确定应旋转所述库存保持器;和至少部分基于确定应旋转所述库存保持器指示所述移动驱动单元进行以下项:将所述库存保持器移离所述限定区域;旋转所述库存保持器;和将所述库存保持器移回所述限定区域。24. The system of clause 19, further comprising a management module operable to: determine that the inventory holder should be rotated; and instruct the mobile drive based at least in part on the determination that the inventory holder should be rotated A unit does the following: move the inventory holder away from the defined area; rotate the inventory holder; and move the inventory holder back to the defined area.

A1.一种用于在库存支架处履行订单的方法,所述方法包括:由管理模块接收多个订单,第一订单包括一个或多个库存物品的请求;由所述管理模块检验所述多个订单以识别库存物品,所述库存物品由安放在库存支架处的库存保持器存储;由所述管理模块至少部分基于确定所述第一订单和所述第二订单包括所述库存物品的请求而使所述多个订单的所述第一订单与所述第二订单分组;在引导站处在订单保持器上配置与所述第一订单相关联的第一容器和与所述第二订单相关联的第二容器,其中所述第一容器和所述第二容器可操作以接收所述库存物品;和由所述管理模块指示移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器从所述引导站运送到所述库存支架,其中所述订单保持器在与所述库存保持器相对的位置处从所述库存支架接收所述库存物品。A1. A method for fulfilling an order at an inventory holder, the method comprising: receiving, by a management module, a plurality of orders, a first order comprising a request for one or more inventory items; an order to identify an inventory item stored by an inventory holder mounted at an inventory holder; based at least in part on a request by the management module to determine that the first order and the second order include the inventory item while grouping said first order of said plurality of orders with said second order; disposing on an order holder at a guiding station a first container associated with said first order and a first container associated with said second order an associated second container, wherein the first container and the second container are operable to receive the inventory item; and instructing, by the management module, a mobile drive unit to transport the order holder from the induction station to the inventory holder, wherein the order holder receives the inventory item from the inventory holder at a location opposite the inventory holder.

A2.根据条款A1所述的方法,其还包括:确定所述第一订单和所述第二订单是否在所述库存支架处完成;如果所述第一订单和所述第二订单在所述库存支架处完成,那么指示所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器运送到装运站;和如果所述第一订单和所述第二订单未在所述库存支架处完成,那么指示所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器运送到库存站。A2. The method of clause A1, further comprising: determining whether the first order and the second order are fulfilled at the inventory holder; if the first order and the second order are fulfilled at the completion at the inventory holder, instruct the mobile drive unit to transport the order holder to a shipping station; and if the first order and the second order are not completed at the inventory holder, instruct the mobile A drive unit transports the order holders to a stocking station.

A3.根据条款A1所述的方法,其还包括:在增加所述第一容器和所述第二容器之后确定所述订单保持器是否具有可用空间用于额外容器;和如果所述订单保持器具有可用空间,那么增加额外容器到所述订单保持器。A3. The method of clause A1, further comprising: determining whether the order holder has space available for an additional container after adding the first container and the second container; and if the order holder With space available, add additional containers to the order holder.

A4.根据条款A1所述的方法,其中所述库存物品包括第一库存物品,所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器,且所述方法还包括:检验所述多个订单中是否具有包括请求所述多个库存物品中的第二库存物品的订单,所述第二库存物品由安放在所述库存支架处的第二库存保持器存储;且其中至少部分基于包括所述第一库存物品和所述第二库存物品的所述第一订单和所述第二订单中的一个或多个分组所述第一订单和所述第二订单。A4. The method of clause A1, wherein the inventory item comprises a first inventory item, the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder, and the method further comprises: verifying whether any of the plurality of orders includes requesting an order for a second inventory item of the plurality of inventory items, the second inventory item being stored by a second inventory holder positioned at the inventory holder; and wherein based at least in part on including the first inventory item and grouping the first order and the second order with one or more of the first order and the second order for the second inventory item.

A5.根据条款A1所述的方法,其还包括:指派第一得分给所述第一订单且指派第二得分给所述第二订单,得分至少部分基于以下项:接收订单请求的一个或多个库存物品所需的行程的量;和位于所述库存支架处的订单上的库存物品的量;且至少部分基于所述第一得分和所述第二得分确定分组所述订单保持器上的所述第一订单与所述第二订单。A5. The method of clause A1, further comprising: assigning a first score to the first order and a second score to the second order, the scores being based at least in part on: one or more of the order requests received and the amount of inventory items on the order located at the inventory holder; and determining to group the order holders based at least in part on the first score and the second score The first order and the second order.

A6.一种管理模块,其包括:内存,其可操作以存储与多个库存物品的多个订单相关联的信息;处理器,其可通信耦合到所述内存且可操作以:获得与所述多个订单相关联的信息;选择两个或多个单元运送所述订单保持器到库存支架;其中所述两个或多个订单在所述订单保持器沿所述库存支架移动时接收所述两个或多个订单请求的库存物品。A6. A management module comprising: a memory operable to store information associated with a plurality of orders for a plurality of inventory items; a processor communicatively coupled to the memory and operable to: obtain information associated with the plurality of inventory items information associated with the plurality of orders; select two or more units to ship the order holder to an inventory rack; wherein the two or more orders receive the Inventory items for two or more order requests.

A7.根据权利要求A6所述的管理模块,所述处理器还可操作以:计算所述移动驱动单元到所述库存支架以填充所述多个订单所需的行程的量;和至少部分基于所计算的行程量,确定选择两个或多个订单且由所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器运送到所述库存支架将减少行程量。A7. The management module of claim A6, the processor further operable to: calculate the amount of travel required of the mobile drive unit to the inventory holder to fill the plurality of orders; and based at least in part on The calculated travel amount, determining that selecting two or more orders and transporting the order holder to the inventory holder by the mobile drive unit will reduce the travel amount.

A8.根据条款A6所述的管理模块,所述处理还可操作以至少部分基于确定所述两个或多个订单只请求位于安放在所述库存支架处的一个或多个库存保持器中的库存物品而从所述多个订单选择所述两个或多个订单来增加到所述订单保持器。A8. The management module of clause A6, the process being further operable to request only those located in one or more inventory holders housed at the inventory holder based at least in part on determining that the two or more orders request only Selecting the two or more orders from the plurality of orders to add to the order holder.

A9.根据条款A6所述的管理模块,所述处理器还可操作以:提供第一指令来利用包括存储在安放在所述库存支架处的库存保持器中的第一库存物品的订单装配订单保持器;提供第一指令来利用包括存储在安放在所述库存支架处的库存保持器中的第一库存物品和存储在除所述库存支架外的位置处的第二库存物品的订单装配订单保持器;和提供第三指令来利用包括存储在除所述库存支架外的位置处的第二库存物品订单装配订单保持器。A9. The management module of clause A6, the processor further operable to: provide a first instruction to assemble an order with an order comprising a first inventory item stored in an inventory holder housed at the inventory holder holder; providing first instructions to assemble an order with an order comprising a first inventory item stored in an inventory holder mounted at the inventory holder and a second inventory item stored at a location other than the inventory holder a holder; and providing third instructions to assemble the order holder with an order comprising a second inventory item stored at a location other than the inventory holder.

A10.根据条款A9所述的管理模块,所述处理器还可操作以:获得指示在其下降库存物品增加到沿所述库存支架的一侧移动的一个或多个订单保持器的速率的信息;和至少部分基于所述速率,确定提供所述第一指令、所述第二指令和所述第三指令的所选指令。A10. The management module of clause A9, the processor further operable to: obtain information indicative of a rate at which falling inventory items are added to one or more order holders moving along a side of the inventory holder and, based at least in part on the rate, determining a selected instruction to provide the first instruction, the second instruction, and the third instruction.

A11.根据条款A6所述的管理模块,所述处理器还可操作以:确定所述库存支架处的工作量是否大于最大工作量;且如果所述工作量大于最大值,那么确定在与所述库存支架不同的库存站处履行订单。A11. The management module of clause A6, the processor further operable to: determine whether the workload at the inventory holder is greater than a maximum workload; and if the workload is greater than the maximum, then determine whether Orders are fulfilled at different stocking stations than the stocking brackets described above.

A12.根据条款A6所述的管理模块,其中所述两个或多个订单包括第一订单和第二订单,且所述处理器还可操作以:至少部分基于以下项利用所述订单保持器选择来履行的所述第一订单和所述第二订单:确定所述第一订单是用于由安放在所述库存支架处的第一限定区域处的第一库存保持器存储的第一库存物品;和确定所述第二订单是用于由安放在所述库存支架处的第二限定区域处的第二库存保持器存储的第二库存物品。A12. The management module of clause A6, wherein the two or more orders comprise a first order and a second order, and the processor is further operable to: utilize the order holder based at least in part on the first order and the second order selected for fulfillment: determining that the first order is for first inventory stored by a first inventory holder positioned at a first defined area at the inventory holder items; and determining that the second order is for a second inventory item stored by a second inventory holder positioned at a second defined area at the inventory holder.

A13.根据条款A6所述的管理模块,所述处理器还可操作以:指示所述库存支架的操作器在其处在所述订单沿所述库存支架移动时期望所述订单保持器接收所述库存物品的特定位置。A13. The management module of clause A6, the processor further operable to: instruct an operator of the inventory holder where it expects the order holder to receive the order holder as the order moves along the inventory holder. A specific location for the described inventory item.

A14.一种包括逻辑的非暂时性计算机可读介质,所述逻辑在由处理器执行时可操作以:指示第一移动驱动单元将库存保持器运送到库存支架,所述指令响应于由库存保持器存储的一个或多个库存物品的速度;和指示第二移动驱动单元将订单保持器运送到所述库存支架,所述指令响应于包括所述一个或多个库存物品的订单,其中所述第二移动驱动单元沿所述库存支架移动所述订单保持器以接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个。A14. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising logic operable when executed by a processor to: instruct a first mobile drive unit to transport an inventory holder to an inventory holder, the instructions being responsive to the velocity of one or more inventory items stored in the holder; and instructing a second mobile drive unit to transport an order holder to the inventory rack, the instruction being responsive to an order comprising the one or more inventory items, wherein the The second mobile drive unit moves the order holder along the inventory holder to receive one or more of the inventory items.

A15.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以启动所述库存支架上的指示器,所述指示器提供在其下所述订单保持器将停止以接收库存物品到所述两个或多个容器中的位置的指示给所述库存支架的操作器。A15. The computer readable medium of clause A14, the logic further operable to activate an indicator on the inventory holder that provides an indicator under which the order holder will stop to receive inventory items to An indication of the location in the two or more containers is given to an operator of the inventory holder.

A16.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以至少部分基于所述库存支架处的多个操作器的工作分配运送所述订单保持器到所述库存支架。A16. The computer-readable medium of clause A14, the logic further operable to ship the order holder to the inventory rack based at least in part on a job assignment of a plurality of operators at the inventory rack.

A17.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以:指示操作器沿所述库存支架移动到在其下所述订单保持器将接收第一库存物品到所述两个或多个容器的第一容器中的位置;和指示所述操作器在所述位置处将所述第一库存物品从库存保持器移动到所述第一容器,所述库存保持器包括多个库存物品。A17. The computer-readable medium of clause A14, the logic further operable to: instruct an operator to move along the inventory holder to a location under which the order holder will receive a first inventory item to the two or a position in a first container of a plurality of containers; and instructing the operator at the position to move the first inventory item from an inventory holder to the first container, the inventory holder comprising a plurality of stock items.

A18.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以确定运送所述订单保持器到所述库存支架,其中所述库存支架包括多个工作区且所述确定是计算来平衡跨越所述多个工作区的工作量。A18. The computer-readable medium of clause A14, the logic further operable to determine to ship the order holder to the inventory holder, wherein the inventory holder includes a plurality of workspaces and the determination is calculated to The workload is balanced across the multiple workspaces.

A19.根据条款A18所述的计算机可读介质,其中工作区包括若干限定区域,库存保持器安放在限定区域处,且所述逻辑至少部分基于由所述库存保持器存储的库存物品的速度确定运送所述库存保持器到所述限定区域。A19. The computer-readable medium of clause A18, wherein the workspace comprises defined areas at which inventory holders are located, and the logic is determined based at least in part on a velocity of inventory items stored by the inventory holders Shipping the stock holder to the defined area.

A20.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述订单保持器包括第一订单保持器且所述逻辑还可操作以:A20. The computer-readable medium of clause A14, wherein the order holder comprises a first order holder and the logic is further operable to:

在所述第一订单沿所述库存支架移动时确定在相同方向上移动的第二订单保持器是否阻挡所述订单保持器与在其处所述订单保持器将接收所述库存物品的第一目的地之间的路径;且As the first order moves along the inventory holder, it is determined whether a second order holder moving in the same direction blocks the order holder from the first order holder at which the order holder will receive the inventory item. the path between the destinations; and

如果所述第二订单保持器阻挡所述路径,那么确定所述第二订单保持器的第二目的地;且如果所述第二目的地沿所述库存支架比所述第一目的地更远,那么启动所述第一位置处的指示器且指示所述移动驱动单元行进到所述第一位置。If the second order holder blocks the path, then determining a second destination for the second order holder; and if the second destination is further along the inventory holder than the first destination , then activate the indicator at the first location and instruct the mobile drive unit to travel to the first location.

A21.根据条款A14所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以:响应于第一触发事件,指示所述移动驱动单元运送所述订单保持器到与所述库存支架相关联的漂移位置;且响应于第二触发事件,指示所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器从所述漂移位置运送到所述库存支架。A21. The computer-readable medium of clause A14, the logic further operable to: in response to a first trigger event, instruct the mobile drive unit to ship the order holder to a drift associated with the inventory holder location; and in response to a second trigger event, instructing the mobile drive unit to transport the order holder from the drift location to the inventory holder.

A22.根据条款A21所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述第一触发事件包括确定所述库存支架处的工作量超过预定工作量且所述第二触发事件包括确定所述工作量低于所述预定工作量。A22. The computer-readable medium of clause A21, wherein the first trigger event includes a determination that the workload at the inventory holder exceeds a predetermined workload and the second trigger event includes a determination that the workload is below the predetermined workload. The scheduled workload.

B1.一种方法,其包括:由管理模块计算多个产品速度,与可用于在库存系统内下单的库存物品的需求相关联的产品速度;由所述管理模块选择安放在所述库存支架处的固定量的库存保持器,所述固定量对应于沿库存支架的第一侧的多个限定区域,其中选择库存保持器安放在限定区域是至少部分基于所述库存物品的所述产品速度,所述库存物品由所述库存保持器存储;由所述管理模块指示移动驱动单元运送所述选择库存保持器到所述限定区域;由所述管理模块接收所述库存物品的订单;和由所述管理模块指示所述移动驱动单元运送与所述订单相关联的订单保持器到所述库存支架的第二侧,其中所述订单保持器可操作以在沿相对所述限定区域的所述第二侧接收所述库存物品。B1. A method comprising: calculating, by a management module, a plurality of product velocities, product velocities associated with demand for inventory items available for placing an order within an inventory system; selecting, by said management module, placement on said inventory holder a fixed amount of inventory holders at a fixed amount corresponding to a plurality of defined areas along a first side of an inventory holder, wherein selecting where an inventory holder is placed in a defined area is based at least in part on the product velocity of the inventory item , the inventory item being stored by the inventory holder; instructing, by the management module, a mobile drive unit to deliver the selected inventory holder to the defined area; receiving an order for the inventory item, by the management module; and by The management module instructs the mobile drive unit to deliver an order holder associated with the order to a second side of the inventory holder, wherein the order holder is operable to move along the A second side receives the inventory item.

B2.根据条款B1所述的方法,其中所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器且所述方法还包括:确定所述第一库存保持器将在所述库存支架处满足的订单上的第一线总量;且其中选择所述第一库存保持器还至少部分基于确定订单上的所述第一线总量大于第二库存保持器在所述库存支架处满足的订单的第二线总量。B2. The method of clause B1, wherein the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder and the method further comprises: determining the first inventory holder on an order to be filled at the inventory holder and wherein selecting said first inventory holder is also based at least in part on determining that said first line amount on an order is greater than a second line amount of an order that a second inventory holder fills at said inventory holder .

B3.根据条款B2所述的方法,其中选择所述第一库存保持器还至少部分基于确定所述第一库存保持器将在所述库存支架处完成比所述第二库存保持器更多量的订单,所述方法还包括:如果由所述订单请求的多个库存物品全位于安放在所述库存支架处的一个或多个库存保持器中,那么确定将在所述库存支架处完成订单。B3. The method of clause B2, wherein selecting the first inventory holder is further based at least in part on determining that the first inventory holder will complete a greater amount at the inventory holder than the second inventory holder , the method further comprising: determining that the order will be fulfilled at the inventory rack if the plurality of inventory items requested by the order are all located in one or more inventory holders housed at the inventory rack .

B4.根据条款B1所述的方法,其中所述多个产品速度包括以下项中的一个或多个:在其下第一库存物品出现在库存物品的多个订单上的第一频率;和在其下期望第二库存物品出现在库存物品的所述多个订单上的第二频率。B4. The method of clause B1, wherein the plurality of product velocities comprises one or more of: a first frequency at which the first inventory item appears on the plurality of orders for the inventory item; and A second frequency at which the second inventory item is expected to appear on the plurality of orders for the inventory item.

B5.根据条款B4所述的方法,其中所述库存保持器包括存储所述第一库存物品的第一库存保持器且所述方法还包括:确定所述第一频率已经变化;且至少部分基于所述第一频率的变化,确定运送第二库存保持器到所述第一库存保持器的所述限定区域以取代所述第一库存保持器。B5. The method of clause B4, wherein the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder storing the first inventory item and the method further comprises: determining that the first frequency has changed; and based at least in part on A change in the first frequency determines the delivery of a second inventory holder to the defined area of the first inventory holder in place of the first inventory holder.

B6.一种系统,其包括:库存支架,其包括布置来安放库存保持器的限定区域,所述库存保持器存储库存物品;移动驱动单元,其可操作以运送订单保持器;和管理模块,其可操作以:计算与所述库存物品的需求相关联的度量;至少部分基于所述度量,从多个库存保持器中选择存储安放在所述库存支架的所述限定区域处的所述库存物品的库存保持器;接收所述库存物品的订单;指示所述移动驱动单元运送所述订单保持器到所述库存支架,所述订单保持器可操作以从接近所述限定区域的所述库存保持器接收所述库存物品。B6. A system comprising: an inventory holder comprising a defined area arranged to seat an inventory holder storing inventory items; a mobile drive unit operable to transport the order holder; and a management module, It is operable to: calculate a metric associated with demand for the inventory item; select from a plurality of inventory holders to store the inventory located at the defined area of the inventory holder based at least in part on the metric an inventory holder of items; receiving an order for said inventory item; instructing said mobile drive unit to deliver said order holder to said inventory holder, said order holder being operable to access said defined area from said inventory holder A holder receives the inventory item.

B7.根据条款B6所述的系统,其中与需求相关联的所述度量包括由所述管理模块生成的任务指派量,且所述管理模块还可操作以:至少部分基于接收所述库存物品的订单计算所生成的任务指派量;和至少部分基于减少生成的任务指派量选择存储安放在所述限定区域处的所述库存物品的所述库存保持器。B7. The system of clause B6, wherein the metrics associated with demand include task assignments generated by the management module, and the management module is further operable to: based at least in part on receipt of the inventory item calculating the generated task assignment amount; and selecting the inventory holder to store the inventory item located at the defined area based at least in part on reducing the generated task assignment amount.

B8.根据条款B6所述的系统,所述管理模块还可操作以:比较可用于下单的多个库存物品中的每个的产品速度;至少部分基于所述比较,选择存储具有高产品速度的库存物品的库存保持器的量;和B8. The system of clause B6, the management module being further operable to: compare a product velocity for each of a plurality of inventory items available for placing an order; and based at least in part on the comparison, select a store with a high product velocity The quantity of inventory items in the stock holder; and

指示一个或多个移动驱动单元运送所述量的库存保持器到所述库存支架。One or more mobile drive units are instructed to deliver the quantity of inventory holders to the inventory holder.

B9.根据条款B6所述的系统,其中所述订单保持器在与存储所述库存物品的所述库存保持器的限定区域相对的位置处接收所述库存物品。B9. The system of clause B6, wherein the order holder receives the inventory item at a location opposite a defined area of the inventory holder where the inventory item is stored.

B10.根据条款B6所述的系统,其中:所述移动驱动单元还可操作以运送所述库存保持器;且所述管理模块还可操作以指示所述移动驱动单元运送所述库存保持器到所述限定区域。B10. The system of clause B6, wherein: the mobile drive unit is further operable to ship the inventory holder; and the management module is further operable to instruct the mobile drive unit to ship the inventory holder to the limited area.

B11.根据条款B10所述的系统,其中所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器且所述管理模块还可操作以指示所述移动驱动单元用第二库存保持器取代所述第一库存保持器。B11. The system of clause B10, wherein the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder and the management module is further operable to instruct the mobile drive unit to replace the first inventory holder with a second inventory holder device.

B12.根据条款B6所述的系统,其中所述度量包括至少部分基于过去订单信息、已知需求和预测未来订单信息中的至少一个确定的产品速度。B12. The system of clause B6, wherein the metric comprises product velocity determined based at least in part on at least one of past order information, known demand, and forecasted future order information.

B13.根据条款B12所述的系统,其中所述度量还包括产品体积,所述产品体积包括由多个订单请求的库存物品的量的立方体积。B13. The system of clause B12, wherein the measure further comprises a product volume comprising a cubic volume of a quantity of inventory items requested by the plurality of orders.

B14.根据条款B6所述的系统,其中所述库存保持器包括两个或多个侧,每侧能够存储一个或多个库存物品且所述管理模块还可操作以:确定存储在所述库存保持器上的库存物品的量低于预定量,所述第一侧面对所述库存支架;且指示所述移动驱动单元旋转所述库存保持器使得所述库存保持器的第二侧面向所述库存支架。B14. The system of clause B6, wherein the inventory holder includes two or more sides, each side capable of storing one or more inventory items and the management module is further operable to: the amount of inventory items on the holder is below a predetermined amount, the first side faces the inventory holder; and the mobile drive unit is instructed to rotate the inventory holder such that the second side of the inventory holder faces the Stock stand.

B15.一种包括逻辑的非暂时性计算机可读介质,所述逻辑在由处理器执行时可操作以:指示第一移动驱动单元将库存保持器运送到库存支架,所述指令响应于由库存保持器存储的一个或多个库存物品的速度;和指示第二移动驱动单元将订单保持器运送到所述库存支架,所述指令响应于包括所述一个或多个库存物品的订单,其中所述第二移动驱动单元沿所述库存支架移动所述订单保持器以接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个。B15. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising logic operable when executed by a processor to: instruct a first mobile drive unit to transport an inventory holder to an inventory holder, the instructions being responsive to instructions issued by the inventory the velocity of one or more inventory items stored in the holder; and instructing a second mobile drive unit to transport an order holder to the inventory rack, the instruction being responsive to an order comprising the one or more inventory items, wherein the The second mobile drive unit moves the order holder along the inventory holder to receive one or more of the inventory items.

B16.根据权利要求B15所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以将所述库存保持器指定用于在履行多个订单时在库存支架处的多个限定区域中的一个处保持固定。B16. The computer readable medium of claim B15, the logic further operable to designate the inventory holder for holding at one of a plurality of defined areas at an inventory holder while fulfilling a plurality of orders fixed.

B17.根据权利要求B15所述的计算机可读介质,其中:所述速度包括第一速度;所述一个或多个库存物品包括一个或多个第一库存物品;所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器;且所述逻辑还可操作以:计算所述一个或多个第一库存物品的所述第一速度;和指示所述第一移动驱动单元至少部分基于确定所述一个或多个第一库存物品的所述第一速度比由第二库存保持器存储的一个或多个第二库存物品的第二速度更高而将所述第一库存保持器运送到所述库存支架。B17. The computer-readable medium of claim B15, wherein: the speed comprises a first speed; the one or more inventory items comprise one or more first inventory items; the inventory holder comprises a first and the logic is further operable to: calculate the first velocity of the one or more first inventory items; and instruct the first mobile drive unit based at least in part on determining the one or more The first velocity of a first inventory item is higher than a second velocity of one or more second inventory items stored by a second inventory holder to transport the first inventory holder to the inventory holder.

B18.根据权利要求B17所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以:在指示所述第一移动驱动单元运送所述第一库存保持器到所述库存支架之后的时间计算所述一个或多个第一库存物品的所述第一速度;和至少部分基于计算所述第一速度低于第三速度,指示所述第一移动驱动单元运送第三库存保持器到所述库存支架。B18. The computer-readable medium of claim B17, the logic further operable to: calculate the said first velocity of one or more first inventory items; and based at least in part on calculating said first velocity to be lower than a third velocity, instructing said first mobile drive unit to convey a third inventory holder to said inventory holder .

B19.根据条款B15所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述速度还包括历史速度、已知需求和期望需求中的一个或多个。B19. The computer-readable medium of clause B15, wherein the velocity further comprises one or more of historical velocity, known demand, and expected demand.

B20.根据条款B15所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述订单保持器包括第一订单保持器且所述逻辑还可操作以指示第三移动驱动单元沿所述库存支架运送第二订单保持器,其中所述第三移动驱动单元和所述第二移动驱动单元在相同方向上移动且在大体相同时间沿所述库存支架移动。B20. The computer-readable medium of clause B15, wherein the order holder comprises a first order holder and the logic is further operable to instruct a third mobile drive unit to transport a second order holder along the inventory rack , wherein the third mobile drive unit and the second mobile drive unit move in the same direction and along the inventory holder at substantially the same time.

B21.根据条款B15所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器,所述订单保持器包括第一订单保持器,且所述逻辑还可操作以:指示所述第一移动驱动单元将存储所述一个或多个库存物品的第二库存保持器运送到所述库存支架;和指示第三移动驱动单元将第二订单保持器运送到所述库存支架,其中在所述第一保持器从所述第一库存保持器接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个时,所述第二订单保持器从所述第二库存保持器接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个,其中所述第一库存保持器中和所述第二库存保持器中的所述库存物品相同。B21. The computer-readable medium of clause B15, wherein the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder, the order holder comprises a first order holder, and the logic is further operable to: instruct the The first mobile drive unit transports a second inventory holder storing the one or more inventory items to the inventory rack; and instructs a third mobile drive unit to transport the second order holder to the inventory rack, wherein at when said first holder receives one or more of said inventory items from said first inventory holder, said second order holder receives one of said inventory items from said second inventory holder or more, wherein the inventory items in the first inventory holder and in the second inventory holder are the same.

虽然已利用若干实施方案对本发明进行描述,但是可对本领域的技术人员建议大量的改变、变体、更改、变换和修改,并且希望本发明涵盖落在随附权利要求范围内的此类变化、变体、更改、变换和修改。此外,虽然已相对于各个实施方案对本公开进行描述,但是完全期望本公开的教导可适当组合在单个实施方案中。While the invention has been described using several embodiments, numerous changes, variations, alterations, transformations and modifications may be suggested to those skilled in the art and it is intended that the present invention cover such changes, Variations, changes, transformations and modifications. In addition, while the disclosure has been described with respect to various embodiments, it is fully contemplated that the teachings of the disclosure can be suitably combined in a single embodiment.

Claims (13)

1.一种用于在库存支架处履行订单的系统,其包括:CLAIMS 1. A system for fulfilling an order at an inventory stand comprising: 库存支架,其包括被指定用于根据多个订单处理库存物品的位置,所述库存支架至少具有第一侧和平行于所述第一侧的第二侧,所述第一侧包括多个限定区域,在所述区域处第一多个库存保持器被指定用于安放,所述库存支架可操作以在所述多个限定区域中的至少一个处从所述第一多个库存保持器中的至少一个接收库存物品,其中,所述第一多个库存保持器在所述库存支架的第一侧上的所述多个限定区域处保持固定,同时通过沿着所述库存支架的第二侧平行于所述库存支架的第一侧移动订单保持器来履行多个订单;和An inventory holder including a location designated for processing inventory items according to a plurality of orders, the inventory holder having at least a first side and a second side parallel to the first side, the first side including a plurality of defined an area at which a first plurality of inventory holders is designated for placement, the inventory holder operable to remove from the first plurality of inventory holders at at least one of the plurality of defined areas at least one of receiving inventory items, wherein the first plurality of inventory holders remain fixed at the plurality of defined areas on a first side of the inventory holder while passing along a second side of the inventory holder moving the order holder laterally parallel to the first side of the inventory holder to fulfill multiple orders; and 第一移动驱动单元,其包括自供电机器人装置;a first mobile drive unit comprising a self-powered robotic device; 管理模块,其可操作以:a management module operable to: 接收针对多个库存物品的订单;Receive orders for multiple inventory items; 确定所述订单请求的库存物品存储于被固定在所述库存支架的限定区域处的库存保持器中,其中所述库存保持器是所述第一多个库存保持器中的一个;determining that inventory items for the order request are stored in an inventory holder secured at a defined area of the inventory holder, wherein the inventory holder is one of the first plurality of inventory holders; 至少部分地基于接收所述订单和确定所述订单请求的所述库存物品存储于固定在所述限定区域中的所述库存保持器中,向所述第一移动驱动单元发送无线指令;transmitting wireless instructions to the first mobile drive unit based at least in part on receiving the order and determining that the inventory items requested for the order are stored in the inventory holder secured in the defined area; 所述第一移动驱动单元可操作以:响应于从所述管理模块接收所述无线指令,沿着所述库存支架的第二侧上的路径的至少一部分运送订单保持器,其中所述订单保持器可操作以在沿着所述库存支架的第二侧的第一位置处从所述库存支架接收所述库存物品,所述第一移动驱动单元还可操作以沿着所述路径从所述第一位置朝所述库存支架的第二侧上的第二位置移动,并且所述库存支架被配置为将所述库存物品处理到有所述订单保持器存储的装运容器中的一个中;并且The first mobile drive unit is operable to, in response to receiving the wireless instruction from the management module, transport an order holder along at least a portion of a path on the second side of the inventory holder, wherein the order holder operable to receive the inventory item from the inventory holder at a first location along the second side of the inventory holder, the first mobile drive unit is also operable to receive the inventory item along the path from the the first position moves toward a second position on a second side of the inventory holder, and the inventory holder is configured to process the inventory item into one of the shipping containers stored by the order holder; and 所述管理模块还可操作以:The management module is also operable to: 检测与所述限定区域处的所述库存保持器相关联的产品速度的变化;detecting a change in product velocity associated with the stock holder at the defined area; 至少部分地基于检测所述变化,指示第二移动驱动单元远离所述限定区域运送所述库存保持器,其中所述第二移动驱动单元可操作以在所述第一移动驱动单元沿着所述库存支架的第二侧上的所述路径朝所述第二位置移动时远离所述限定区域运送所述库存保持器。Instructing a second mobile drive unit to transport the inventory holder away from the defined area based at least in part on detecting the change, wherein the second mobile drive unit is operable to travel along the first mobile drive unit along the The path on the second side of the inventory holder transports the inventory holder away from the defined area as it moves toward the second position. 2.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中所述第一多个库存保持器至少部分基于存储在所述第一多个库存保持器中的一个或多个库存物品的产品速度而指定用于所述限定区域。2. The system of claim 1 , wherein the first plurality of inventory holders is designated for use at least in part based on a product velocity of one or more inventory items stored in the first plurality of inventory holders. the limited area. 3.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中由所述订单保持器存储的所述装运容器中的至少一部分与请求存储在所述第一多个库存保持器中的一个中的库存物品的一个或多个订单相关联。3. The system of claim 1 , wherein at least a portion of the shipping containers stored by the order holder is the same as one of the inventory items requested to be stored in one of the first plurality of inventory holders. or multiple orders are associated. 4.根据权利要求1所述的系统,所述第二移动驱动单元还可操作以:4. The system of claim 1, the second mobile drive unit further operable to: 在所述限定区域中的一个处以来自所述第一多个库存保持器的第二库存保持器取代所述第一多个库存保持器的所述库存保持器,其中至少部分基于与所述库存保持器相关联的度量取代所述库存保持器。Replacing the inventory holder of the first plurality of inventory holders at one of the defined areas with a second inventory holder from the first plurality of inventory holders based at least in part on a relationship with the inventory The keeper's associated metrics supersede the inventory keeper. 5.根据权利要求1所述的系统,所述库存支架还包括界面,所述界面可操作以指示所述库存支架的操作器从所述库存保持器中移除所述库存物品且将所述库存物品放置在存储在所述订单保持器中的装运容器中,所述装运容器与所述订单相关联。5. The system of claim 1 , the inventory holder further comprising an interface operable to instruct an operator of the inventory holder to remove the inventory item from the inventory holder and place the Inventory items are placed in shipping containers stored in the order holder, the shipping containers being associated with the order. 6.一种用于在库存支架处履行订单的方法,所述方法包括:6. A method for fulfilling an order at an inventory stand, the method comprising: 由包括编码在非暂态介质中并且由处理器执行的逻辑的管理模块接收多个订单,第一订单包括一个或多个库存物品的请求;receiving, by a management module comprising logic encoded in the non-transitory medium and executed by the processor, a plurality of orders, a first order comprising a request for one or more inventory items; 由所述管理模块检验所述多个订单以识别与特定产品体积或特定产品速度相关联的库存物品,所述库存物品由安放在库存支架处的多个限定区域处的多个库存保持器中的库存保持器存储,其中所述库存支架包括被指定用于根据所述多个订单处理库存产品的位置,所述库存支架至少具有第一侧和平行于所述第一侧的第二侧,并且所述多个限定区域位于所述第一侧并且被指定用于与一个或多个产品体积或一个或多个产品速度相关联的库存保持器;verifying, by the management module, the plurality of orders to identify inventory items associated with a particular product volume or a particular product velocity, the inventory items being housed in a plurality of inventory holders at a plurality of defined areas at an inventory rack an inventory keeper store, wherein the inventory holder includes a location designated for processing inventory products according to the plurality of orders, the inventory holder has at least a first side and a second side parallel to the first side, and said plurality of defined areas are located on said first side and are designated for inventory holders associated with one or more product volumes or one or more product velocities; 指派第一得分给所述第一订单且指派第二得分给第二订单,得分至少部分基于以下项:(1)接收订单请求的一个或多个库存物品所需的行程的量;(2)和位于所述库存支架处的订单上的库存物品的量;assigning a first score to the first order and assigning a second score to the second order, the score being based at least in part on: (1) the amount of travel required to receive the one or more inventory items requested by the order; (2) and the quantity of inventory items on the order located at said inventory rack; 至少部分地基于所述第一得分和所述第二得分以及所述第一订单和所述第二订单包括对所述库存物品的请求,确定分组所述订单保持器上的所述第一订单与所述第二订单,并且由所述管理模块将所述多个订单的所述第一订单与所述第二订单分组;determining to group the first order on the order holder based at least in part on the first score and the second score and that the first order and the second order include a request for the inventory item with the second order, and grouping the first order of the plurality of orders with the second order by the management module; 至少部分地基于所述第一订单和所述第二订单的分组,在引导站处在订单保持器上布置与所述第一订单相关联的第一容器和与所述第二订单相关联的第二容器,其中所述第一容器和所述第二容器可操作以接收所述库存物品;和Based at least in part on the grouping of the first order and the second order, arranging a first container associated with the first order and a container associated with the second order on an order holder at an induction station a second container, wherein the first container and the second container are operable to receive the inventory item; and 响应于确定所述第一容器和所述第二容器被布置在所述订单保持器上,由所述管理模块指示包括自供电机器人装置的移动驱动单元,其中所述指示被配置为使得所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器从所述引导站运送到所述库存支架的第二侧,其中所述订单保持器沿着所述库存支架的第二侧在与所述库存保持器相对的位置处从所述库存支架接收所述库存物品。In response to determining that the first container and the second container are disposed on the order holder, instructing, by the management module, a mobile drive unit comprising a self-powered robotic device, wherein the instructing is configured such that the a mobile drive unit transports the order holder from the guidance station to a second side of the inventory holder, wherein the order holder is along the second side of the inventory holder at a position opposite the inventory holder A location receives the inventory item from the inventory holder. 7.根据权利要求6所述的方法,其还包括:7. The method of claim 6, further comprising: 确定所述第一订单和所述第二订单是否在所述库存支架处完成;determining whether the first order and the second order are fulfilled at the inventory holder; 如果所述第一订单和所述第二订单在所述库存支架处完成,那么指示所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器运送到装运站;和instructing the mobile drive unit to transport the order holder to a shipping station if the first order and the second order are fulfilled at the inventory holder; and 如果所述第一订单和所述第二订单未在所述库存支架处完成,那么指示所述移动驱动单元将所述订单保持器运送到库存站。If the first order and the second order are not fulfilled at the inventory holder, instructing the mobile drive unit to transport the order holder to an inventory station. 8.根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中所述库存物品包括第一库存物品,所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器,且所述方法还包括:8. The method of claim 6, wherein the inventory item comprises a first inventory item, the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder, and the method further comprises: 检验所述多个订单中是否具有包括请求所述多个库存物品中的第二库存物品的订单,所述第二库存物品由安放在所述库存支架处的第二库存保持器存储;且checking whether the plurality of orders includes a request for a second inventory item of the plurality of inventory items, the second inventory item being stored by a second inventory holder disposed at the inventory holder; and 其中至少部分基于包括所述第一库存物品和所述第二库存物品的所述第一订单和所述第二订单中的一个或多个分组所述第一订单和所述第二订单。wherein the first order and the second order are grouped based at least in part on one or more of the first order and the second order comprising the first inventory item and the second inventory item. 9.一种包括逻辑的非暂时性计算机可读介质,所述逻辑在由处理器执行时可操作以:9. A non-transitory computer readable medium comprising logic operable when executed by a processor to: 指示第一移动驱动单元将库存保持器运送到库存支架,所述逻辑响应于由库存保持器存储的一个或多个库存物品的速度;和instructing the first mobile drive unit to transport the inventory holder to the inventory holder, the logic being responsive to a velocity of the one or more inventory items stored by the inventory holder; and 指示第二移动驱动单元将订单保持器运送到所述库存支架,所述逻辑响应于包括所述一个或多个库存物品的订单,其中所述第二移动驱动单元沿所述库存支架移动所述订单保持器以接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个;并且instructing a second mobile drive unit to ship an order holder to the inventory holder, the logic responsive to an order comprising the one or more inventory items, wherein the second mobile drive unit moves the an order holder to receive one or more of said inventory items; and 其中所述订单保持器包括第一订单保持器且所述逻辑还可操作以指示第三移动驱动单元沿所述库存支架运送第二订单保持器,其中所述第三移动驱动单元和所述第二移动驱动单元在相同方向上移动且在相同时间沿所述库存支架移动;并且wherein the order holder comprises a first order holder and the logic is further operable to instruct a third mobile drive unit to transport a second order holder along the inventory rack, wherein the third mobile drive unit and the first order holder two mobile drive units move in the same direction and at the same time along the inventory holder; and 其中,所述速度还包括期望需求。Wherein, the speed also includes expected demand. 10.根据权利要求9所述的计算机可读介质,所述逻辑还可操作以将所述库存保持器指定用于在履行多个订单时在库存支架处的多个限定区域中的一个处保持固定。10. The computer readable medium of claim 9 , the logic further operable to designate the inventory holder to hold at one of a plurality of defined areas at an inventory holder while fulfilling a plurality of orders fixed. 11.根据权利要求9所述的计算机可读介质,其中:11. The computer readable medium of claim 9, wherein: 所述速度包括第一速度;the speeds include a first speed; 所述一个或多个库存物品包括一个或多个第一库存物品;the one or more inventory items include one or more first inventory items; 所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器;且the inventory holders include a first inventory holder; and 所述逻辑还可操作以:The logic is also operable to: 计算所述一个或多个第一库存物品的所述第一速度;和calculating the first velocity of the one or more first inventory items; and 指示所述第一移动驱动单元至少部分基于确定所述一个或多个第一库存物品的所述第一速度比由第二库存保持器存储的一个或多个第二库存物品的第二速度更高而将所述第一库存保持器运送到所述库存支架。instructing the first mobile drive unit based at least in part on determining that the first velocity of the one or more first inventory items is faster than a second velocity of one or more second inventory items stored by a second inventory holder and transporting the first inventory holder to the inventory holder. 12.根据权利要求9所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述速度还包括历史速度、已知需求和期望需求中的一个或多个。12. The computer-readable medium of claim 9, wherein the velocity further comprises one or more of historical velocity, known demand, and expected demand. 13.根据权利要求9所述的计算机可读介质,其中所述库存保持器包括第一库存保持器,所述订单保持器包括第一订单保持器,且所述逻辑还可操作以:13. The computer-readable medium of claim 9, wherein the inventory holder comprises a first inventory holder, the order holder comprises a first order holder, and the logic is further operable to: 指示所述第一移动驱动单元将存储所述一个或多个库存物品的第二库存保持器运送到所述库存支架;和instructing the first mobile drive unit to transport a second inventory holder storing the one or more inventory items to the inventory holder; and 指示第三移动驱动单元将第二订单保持器运送到所述库存支架,其中在所述第一订单保持器从所述第一库存保持器接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个时,所述第二订单保持器从所述第二库存保持器接收所述库存物品中的一个或多个,其中所述第一库存保持器中和所述第二库存保持器中的所述库存物品相同。instructing a third mobile drive unit to ship a second order holder to the inventory holder, wherein when the first order holder receives one or more of the inventory items from the first inventory holder, the The second order holder receives one or more of the inventory items from the second inventory holder, wherein the inventory items in the first inventory holder and the second inventory holder are the same .
CN201380058814.4A 2012-10-04 2013-10-03 Fill order at inventory stand Active CN104903922B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/644,679 US20140100999A1 (en) 2012-10-04 2012-10-04 Filling an order at an inventory pier
US13/644,646 2012-10-04
US13/644,646 US9009072B2 (en) 2012-10-04 2012-10-04 Filling an order at an inventory pier
US13/644,679 2012-10-04
US13/644,591 US9792577B2 (en) 2012-10-04 2012-10-04 Filling an order at an inventory pier
US13/644,591 2012-10-04
PCT/US2013/063176 WO2014055716A1 (en) 2012-10-04 2013-10-03 Filling an order at an inventory pier

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN104903922A CN104903922A (en) 2015-09-09
CN104903922B true CN104903922B (en) 2018-12-18

Family

ID=50435419

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201380058814.4A Active CN104903922B (en) 2012-10-04 2013-10-03 Fill order at inventory stand

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2904553A4 (en)
JP (1) JP6246818B2 (en)
CN (1) CN104903922B (en)
WO (1) WO2014055716A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015052825A1 (en) * 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 株式会社日立製作所 Transfer robot system
EP3207510A1 (en) * 2014-10-14 2017-08-23 Harvest Automation, Inc. Storage material handling system
US9057508B1 (en) 2014-10-22 2015-06-16 Codeshelf Modular hanging lasers to enable real-time control in a distribution center
CN104444384B (en) * 2014-10-27 2017-11-21 北京京东尚科信息技术有限公司 The method and apparatus for handling code-disc data
US9327397B1 (en) 2015-04-09 2016-05-03 Codeshelf Telepresence based inventory pick and place operations through robotic arms affixed to each row of a shelf
US9262741B1 (en) 2015-04-28 2016-02-16 Codeshelf Continuous barcode tape based inventory location tracking
CN106006084B (en) * 2016-07-04 2023-03-24 杭州国辰机器人科技有限公司 Method and system for storing and transporting animal carcasses
CN112607293B (en) * 2017-01-16 2022-05-03 浙江国自机器人技术股份有限公司 Safety protection method and safety protection structure of AGV robot
US20180204170A1 (en) * 2017-01-18 2018-07-19 Jusda International Logistics (TAIWAN) CO.,LTD Storage location assignment device and method for a storage system
CN108357886A (en) * 2017-01-26 2018-08-03 菜鸟智能物流控股有限公司 Item sorting method and related apparatus
KR102289649B1 (en) 2017-07-03 2021-08-13 베이징 긱플러스 테크놀러지 시오. 엘티디 Relay-type article picking system and picking method
CN108750521A (en) * 2017-07-11 2018-11-06 浙江国自机器人技术有限公司 Work platform and order completion system
CN107748975A (en) * 2017-10-09 2018-03-02 重庆长安民生物流股份有限公司 Warehouse storage area computation method, acquisition methods and Warehouse Establishing method
JP7067970B2 (en) * 2018-03-13 2022-05-16 株式会社日立インダストリアルプロダクツ Transport system
JP6905147B2 (en) * 2018-03-27 2021-07-21 株式会社日立インダストリアルプロダクツ Warehouse system
CN108382779B (en) * 2018-04-28 2024-05-14 上海托华机器人有限公司 Intelligent storage sorting system, goods shelf and AGV
US10783656B2 (en) * 2018-05-18 2020-09-22 Zebra Technologies Corporation System and method of determining a location for placement of a package
MX2020013280A (en) 2018-06-08 2021-02-22 Attabotics Inc Improved storage and retrieval systems.
JP7199848B2 (en) * 2018-06-27 2023-01-06 株式会社日立インダストリアルプロダクツ Picking support method
JP7226512B2 (en) * 2018-07-13 2023-02-21 株式会社ダイフク Goods sorting equipment
CN109117999B (en) * 2018-08-06 2021-07-02 北京极智嘉科技股份有限公司 Seeding bit distribution method, device, server and medium
CN109878959B (en) * 2019-03-15 2021-08-27 北京旷视机器人技术有限公司 Sorting scheduling method and device, warehousing system and readable storage medium
CN110197309B (en) * 2019-06-05 2021-11-26 北京极智嘉科技股份有限公司 Order processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
KR102743591B1 (en) 2019-06-11 2024-12-17 애터보틱스 인크 Manufacturing system with interconnected storage structures and manufacturing cells sharing a common robot population
CN110921170A (en) 2019-11-29 2020-03-27 北京极智嘉科技有限公司 Container storage system, warehousing system, robot control method and robot
US20230133964A1 (en) 2019-12-03 2023-05-04 Attabotics Inc. Automated storage and retrieval system reducing bin moves by selecting multi-stock bins containing highest number of skus on workstation stock waitlist
JP7186160B2 (en) * 2019-12-12 2022-12-08 北京極智嘉科技股▲ふん▼有限公司 Relay type article sorting system and sorting method
CN112224733B (en) * 2020-11-05 2022-08-12 北京极智嘉科技股份有限公司 Warehouse management system and method
CN114380241B (en) * 2022-01-12 2025-10-21 福建中科兰剑智能装备科技有限公司 A laser forklift AGV magazine automatic docking system for the lithium battery front process
JP2023104062A (en) * 2022-01-17 2023-07-28 株式会社Pal Logistics warehouse equipment
JP7601934B2 (en) * 2022-12-09 2024-12-17 トーヨーカネツ株式会社 Logistics system, logistics system control method, logistics system control program, and storage medium

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1532941A (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-09-29 ������������ʽ���� Solid-state imaging device and manufacturing method thereof

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2857500A (en) 1999-01-25 2000-08-07 Lilly Software Associates, Inc. Distribution center management system
US6505093B1 (en) * 2000-05-03 2003-01-07 Si Handling Systems, Inc. Automated order filling method and system
CA2435115C (en) * 2001-01-26 2011-03-22 Bakvertisi Limited Method and apparatus for container storage and container retrieval
JP4325588B2 (en) * 2005-05-30 2009-09-02 株式会社ダイフク Moving trolley
US9330373B2 (en) * 2005-07-19 2016-05-03 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Method and system for storing inventory holders
WO2007011814A2 (en) * 2005-07-19 2007-01-25 Kiva Systems, Inc. Method and system for storing inventory holders
US7894933B2 (en) * 2005-07-19 2011-02-22 Kiva Systems, Inc. Method and system for retrieving inventory items
US8220710B2 (en) * 2006-06-19 2012-07-17 Kiva Systems, Inc. System and method for positioning a mobile drive unit
US8311902B2 (en) * 2007-01-05 2012-11-13 Amazon Technologies, Inc. System and method for filling an order
US20110200420A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-18 Velociti Alliance North America, Inc. Warehouse dynamic picking slots
DE102010010305B4 (en) * 2010-03-04 2014-02-13 SSI Schäfer PEEM GmbH Universal high performance picking workstation for fast and slow movers
US8838612B2 (en) * 2010-09-16 2014-09-16 Oracle International Corporation Methods and systems for implementing fulfillment management

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1532941A (en) * 2003-03-24 2004-09-29 ������������ʽ���� Solid-state imaging device and manufacturing method thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2014055716A1 (en) 2014-04-10
JP6246818B2 (en) 2017-12-13
CN104903922A (en) 2015-09-09
EP2904553A1 (en) 2015-08-12
JP2015535787A (en) 2015-12-17
EP2904553A4 (en) 2016-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN104903922B (en) Fill order at inventory stand
US9009072B2 (en) Filling an order at an inventory pier
US9792577B2 (en) Filling an order at an inventory pier
US20140100999A1 (en) Filling an order at an inventory pier
US10482401B2 (en) System and method for arranging an order
US9663293B2 (en) Replenishing a retail facility
US11049067B2 (en) Workflow management system integrating robots
US20210221619A1 (en) Interchangeable automated mobile robots with a plurality of operating modes configuring a plurality of different robot task capabilities
US7774243B1 (en) Method and system for predestination item transfer among agents within a materials handling facility
US8306650B1 (en) Method and system for agent exchange-based materials handling
KR102300277B1 (en) Methods, systems and apparatus for controlling movement of transporting devices
US9346620B2 (en) System and method for order fulfillment
US9051120B2 (en) Control system for storage and retrieval systems
US20140188671A1 (en) System and method for filling an order
CN110582455A (en) Automated warehouse fulfillment operations and systems
CN109583800A (en) Logistics warehouse packages methods, devices and systems
CN107408285A (en) Warehouse management system, warehouse and warehouse management method
JP7756539B2 (en) Transport system and method
JP7454746B2 (en) Conveying system and method
JP2024171865A (en) Transport system, control device and control method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
GR01 Patent grant
GR01 Patent grant